JP2023080805A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To realize healthy game properties and prevent deterioration of game amusement.SOLUTION: A main control board measures a safe ball number on a satisfaction of a first measurement condition, measures an out ball number on a satisfaction of a second measurement condition, and calculates a difference ball number between the safe ball number and the out ball number. When the calculated difference ball number satisfies a predetermined threshold, a progress of a game is restricted. A performance control board enables executing a read-ahead performance in a winning game, when the winning game is executed but the predetermined threshold is not satisfied, and restricts the read-ahead performance in the winning game, when the winning game is executed and the predetermined threshold is satisfied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 78

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A gaming machine is provided with a probability fluctuation state that changes the probability of a big win from a low probability to a high probability, and an upper limit is set for the continuation of the probability fluctuation state so that the number of big wins that occur due to the continuation of the probability fluctuation state does not exceed a predetermined number of times. By having the , it was possible to realize a healthy game and prevent a decline in the interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2020-28573 A

However, there is still room for improvement in order to realize a more sound game and prevent the loss of interest in the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to realize healthy game playability and prevent a decline in game interest.

A gaming machine according to the present invention comprises main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects in predetermined effect means based on control information transmitted from the main control means. The main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information, determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and Pre-determining means for pre-determining the determination information in advance; measuring means for measuring a first value when a first measurement condition is satisfied and measuring a second value when a second measurement condition is satisfied; calculation means for calculating specific information based on the first value and the second value; and regulation means for regulating the progress of the game when the specific information satisfies a predetermined threshold, When the specific information does not satisfy a predetermined threshold value due to the execution of the special game, the performance control means is capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the prior determination during the execution of the special game, while the special game When the specific information satisfies a predetermined threshold value by the execution of , it is possible to limit the execution of the predetermined effect based on the prior determination during the execution of the special game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize sound game playability and prevent a decline in game interest.

1 is an external front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is an external rear view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a diagram showing (A) a special symbol hit determination table and (B) a normal symbol hit determination table according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing (A) a special symbol determination table, (B) a normal symbol determination table, and (C) round details for each special symbol according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a game state transition diagram according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation pattern table according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing (A) a determination information storage area of the main RAM and (B) a counter of the main RAM according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a figure which shows the command table|table (1/2) based on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the command table|table (2/2) based on 1st Embodiment of this invention. 2 is a flowchart (1/2) showing a main control board main process according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 2 is a flowchart (2/2) showing a main control board main process according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing set value change processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing set value confirmation processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing main control board timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing input switch detection processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing processing when detecting a first starting port according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing out detection processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows special design related processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special design fluctuation concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process classified by game state which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows winning game processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing abnormality determination processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing limit management processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a flow chart which shows production control board main processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing the effect control board timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing operation device input processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing main command reception processing (1/2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main command reception processing (2/2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a holding continuous effect determination process according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a difference ball number counter display control process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a winning sound, a changing sound, and a starter light emitting device (color) for each icon according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a figure which shows the announcement determination table 1 (announcement before reach) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a dialog advance notice determination table according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a figure which shows the button vibration advance notice determination table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the announcement determination table 2 (announcement in reach) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing (a) a logo advance notice determination table and (b) a car group advance notice determination table according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing (a) a notice determination table 3 (notice during super reach_notice of conversation) according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and (b) shows a notice determination table 4 (notice during super reach_notice of cut-in); It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the (c) advance notice determination table 5 (judgment in super reach) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the previous notice of words which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect of button vibration advance notice which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the logo announcement which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a mode of a logo announcement accompanied by a pseudo-run according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a figure which shows the aspect of the vehicle group advance notice which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the cut-in notice which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the judgment production|presentation which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the conversation announcement which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the conversation announcement which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the conversation announcement which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a simple time chart (normal game state) of the variable effect according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a simple time chart of the variable production according to the first embodiment of the present invention (time reduction game state, probability variable game state). FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of display of the number of games (fluctuation pattern 2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of game number display (fluctuation pattern 3) according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display of the number of games (variation pattern 4) according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display of the number of games (fluctuation pattern 10) according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of game number display (fluctuation pattern 6) according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of displaying the number of games according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an update mode of game number display according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an update mode of game number display according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an update mode of game number display according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an update mode of game number display according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the display of the number of games for each production stage according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an update mode of game number display according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (irregular case) of update mode of the display of the number of games according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of an update mode (modification of FIG. 66) of game number display according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a figure which shows the alert|reporting aspect at the time of the limit function operation|movement which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram illustrating a notification mode when ending the time-saving game state according to the first embodiment of the present invention and shifting to the normal game state, and a notification mode when the limit function is activated in the time-saving game state. It is a diagram showing a notification mode at the time of limit function operation in the winning game according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing various modes of operation when a limit function is activated according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a figure explaining the notification mode at the time of the power supply ON which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting|reporting aspect of limit function installation which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting|reporting aspect of limit function installation which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting|reporting aspect of limit function installation which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining advance notification before a limit function operation concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining each aspect of prior notification before the limit function operation|movement which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the aspect of the look-ahead effect|presentation according to the present difference ball number which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the aspect of the look-ahead effect|presentation according to the present difference ball number which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the gaming machine concerning 2nd Embodiment of this invention.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In the first embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 (a pachinko game machine capable of discharging game balls to the outside of the game machine) will be described as an example of the game machine according to the present invention. In the following description, "front", "rear", "left", "right", "upper" and "lower" refer to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. pointing.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko game machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2 for installation on a game machine installation island (not shown) of a game parlor, and a game board 6 pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and shown in FIG. a detachably held middle frame 3; a glass frame 4 pivotally supported by the middle frame 3 and opposed to the front side of the game board 6 so that the game board 6 can be visually recognized through transparent glass; It has a tray member 5 which is positioned below the supported glass frame 4 and can store game balls. In addition, the glass frame 4 and the receiving plate member 5 may be configured as a separate type, or may be configured as an integrated type.

The middle frame 3 is provided with a shooting device for shooting game balls to the game area 7 of the game board 6, and is provided with a shooting handle 8 for making the shooting device perform a shooting operation. The shooting handle 8 is gripped by the player and can be rotated within a predetermined range, and the amount of rotation (volume) adjusts the shooting strength when shooting the game ball into the game area 7. It is possible. For example, when it is rotated by the first rotation amount (when it is the first firing intensity), the game ball is shot to the left side of the game area 7 (the game area 7a shown in FIG. 3) (so-called "left ), and when it is rotated by a second rotation amount that is larger than the first rotation amount (in the case of the second firing intensity), the right side of the game area 7 (Fig. 3 A game ball is shot into the game area 7b) indicated by (so-called "right-handed hitting" becomes possible). The game area 7a constitutes a predetermined path, and the game area 7b constitutes a specific path.

The firing handle 8 is provided with a handle touch sensor (not shown). This handle touch sensor is turned ON when the player grips the shooting handle 8 , and the ON signal is input to the payout control board 300 . Thereby, it can be grasped that the shooting handle 8 is held by the player.

A light-emitting device 9 (lamp, LED, etc.) is provided on the glass frame 4 so that the pachinko game machine 1 can be decorated by emitting light. For example, in the special symbol winning determination process described later, it is possible to execute an effect of notifying the winning by emitting light in rainbow colors based on the fact that the winning is determined.

A speaker 10 is provided on the glass frame 4 (above), and can output music (BGM), voice, and sound effects. For example, when the normal game state described later is controlled, music corresponding to the normal game state can be output, and when the time-saving game state (A, B) described later is controlled, the time-saving game state ( A, B) can be output music according to, and when the probability variation gaming state described later is controlled, it is possible to output music according to the probability variation gaming state.
A lower speaker 10 is provided on the glass frame 4 (lower side), and can output voice and sound effects. The lower speaker 10 is provided with a speaker lamp 10a, which emits light in a prize-winning flash effect, which will be described later.

In the light emitting device 9 and the speaker 10, it is possible to execute an abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, the light-emitting device 9 can emit light in a light-emitting pattern dedicated to notification of an abnormality, and the speaker 10 can output a sound or warning sound for notifying the specific content of the abnormality.

The receiving tray member 5 is composed of an upper receiving tray 5a and a lower receiving tray 5b, and when the amount of game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 5a exceeds a predetermined amount, game balls are dispensed to the lower receiving tray 5b. ing. In addition, the receiving tray member 5 includes a ball eject button 11 for ejecting the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 5a to the lower receiving tray 5b at the end of the game, and a game ball release device (not shown). a ball lending button 12 for requesting the payout of the game ball lending device, a card return button 13 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium (prepaid card, membership card) inserted in the insertion slot of the game ball lending device, and the valuable value medium A balance display section 12a for displaying the balance and a lendable ball lamp 12b for notifying that the ball lendable by operating the ball lending button 12 is possible are provided.

In addition, on the tray member 5, an operation prompting effect (for example, an effect in which an image simulating an operation means + an image saying "Press!" is displayed on the operation means) is executed. A performance button 14 and a performance lever 15 that can be operated by the player are provided. Note that the effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 may be provided independently, or may be provided integrally.

Also, one or both of the effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 may be vibrated by providing a vibrating device. For example, it may be vibrated as a notice effect (see FIG. 37), or it may be vibrated when notifying that the game will shift to a winning game. It should be noted that either one of the production button 14 and the production lever 15 may be provided, or a plurality of either one may be provided.

In addition, the receiver member 5 can be operated by the player to adjust the volume of music (BGM), voice, and sound effects output from the speaker 10, adjust the amount of light emitted from the light emitting device 9, and adjust the amount of light emitted from the light emitting device 9. A cross key button 16 is provided for adjusting the amount of light emitted from the display device 26, activating a menu screen, and performing operations corresponding to each menu. As an operation device for operating the menu screen, the cross key button 16 may be separately provided with a dedicated operation device for adjusting the volume and the amount of light.

Also, the upper end of the outer frame 2 is provided with a decorative portion 2a. The decorative portion 2a further extends upward from the upper end of the outer frame, and has, for example, a character-like shape to give a visual impact. On the other hand, it is difficult for some players to visually recognize the member (for example, the external information display 800) located behind the decorative portion 2a.
The decorative portion 2a may always extend upward from the upper end of the outer frame 2, or may be configured to change from the retracted state to the extended state when a predetermined trigger is met.

Next, based on FIG. 2, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Various control boards such as a main control board 100, an effect control board 200, a payout control board 300 and a payout device 304, and a power supply board 400 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 (exactly , these various control boards are attached to the rear surface of the middle frame 3).

A RAM clear switch 105 is also provided on the main control board 100 . The RAM clear switch 105 is a switch for initializing game information that is rewritten in the area of the main RAM 103 when a game is played. For example, when the closing time of the amusement arcade is approached while the time-saving game state (A or B) is reached, if the manager (for example, the game clerk) turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 105, the time-saving game state ( The game information of A or B) is cleared, and the normal game state can be started at the opening time of the next day.

The RAM clear switch 105 is also a switch for switching set values in a setting change state, which will be described later. Details will be described later in the flow chart. For example, in the case of providing six levels of set values, if the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once while the set value "1" is displayed on the display 104, which will be described later, the set value When the setting value "1" is changed to the setting value "2" and the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once, the setting value is changed from "2" to the setting value "3". , set value “4”, set value “5”, and set value “6”, and when the set value “6” is displayed on the display 104, when the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once, the set value The set value is switched from "6" to "1".

Although the RAM clear switch 105 is provided on the main control board 100, it may be provided on the power supply board 400 or may be provided directly on the middle frame 3, for example, as long as it can be input to the main control board 100.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a setting change keyhole 31 (also referred to as a setting key SW in this embodiment). The setting change keyhole 31 is used when setting one of a plurality of stages of setting values, which will be described later. Specifically, a setting change key (not shown) managed by a store clerk is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees (rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction), When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on (the power switch 400a is turned on) while pressing the RAM clear switch 105, a setting change state is entered in which setting values can be set. Details of the setting change state will be described later with a flowchart.

The setting change keyhole 31 is also used when checking the currently set setting value. Specifically, a setting change key managed by a store clerk is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees (rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction) so that the pachinko machine 1 When the power is turned on (the power switch 400a is turned on), a setting confirmation state is entered in which setting values can be confirmed. Details of the setting confirmation state will be described later with a flowchart.

The setting change keyhole 31 can be rotated by a setting change key. For example, the main CPU 101 detects three positions (states) of a vertical position, a horizontal position, and an oblique position. It is possible.

Although the setting change keyhole 31 is provided in the main control board 100, the installation location is not limited to this. For example, the middle frame 3 may be provided with a setting change keyhole 31 .

A display 104 is also provided on the main control board 100 . If the display 104 is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the setting value is displayed. The game performance information calculated by the following formula is displayed: number of balls paid out/number of out balls in normal game state)×100.

The gaming performance information is calculated for each interrupt (for example, every 4 ms) in a state other than the setting change state or setting confirmation state (for example, the state in which the interrupt is permitted in step S24 of FIG. 13). , It is possible to display the current section and the past 3 sections (1 section before, 2 sections before, and 3 sections before) at predetermined display timings (for example, every 5 seconds). It's becoming That is, display of current section→elapsed predetermined time (elapsed 5 seconds)→display of past section (1)→elapsed of predetermined time (elapsed 5 seconds)→display of past section (2)→elapsed predetermined time (5 seconds) elapsed)→display of past section (3)→elapsed predetermined time (elapsed 5 seconds)→display of current section.

Next, based on FIG. 3, the configuration of the game board 6 of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. The game board 6 is made of a veneer material or a transparent synthetic resin material, and an image display device 26 is detachably attached to the back side thereof. A game area 7 in which game balls can roll is formed on the game board 6, and an outer rail member 18 and an inner rail member 19 are provided for guiding the game balls launched from the shooting device to the game area 7. is formed. In addition, the game area 7 includes a gate member 20 through which a game ball can pass, a first starting hole 21 through which a game ball can enter, and a stage 17 for facilitating ball entry into the first starting hole 21. , a second starting hole 22 into which a game ball can enter, a normal winning hole 23 into which a game ball can enter, and a large winning hole into which a game ball can enter when a winning game described later is being executed. 24, an out port 25 for discharging game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports outside the game area (game ball discharge gutter), a movable body 28 that can move vertically, and other game nails. (illustration omitted), a windmill, etc. are provided.

The game area 7 has a game area 7a formed on the left side of the center (a game area for so-called "left hitting") and a game area 7b formed on the right side of the center (a game area for so-called "right hitting"). are doing.

The gate member 20 is provided in the right central portion of the game area 7, and allows the game ball to pass through when the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area 7, i.e., when the game ball is hit to the right. It's becoming In addition, it is always open upwards to always allow the passage of game balls. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20 and is detected by the gate detection SW 20a, the later-described "passing gate detection processing" is performed, and a protruding member (not shown) provided at the second starting port 22 ``normal symbol winning determination processing'' for determining whether or not to protrude, and after the normal symbol variation time elapses, a ``normal symbol variation game'' for deriving the determination result of the normal symbol winning determination processing is executed. In addition, the gate member 20 may also be provided in the left central portion of the game area 7 .

When the game ball passes through the gate member 20 while the normal symbol variation game based on passage through the gate member 20 is being performed, the execution of the normal symbol variation game based on the passage is suspended. , excluding the normal symbol variation game being executed, a maximum of "4" can be reserved. Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a reserve storage area for the normal symbol variation game, and the reserve storage area is, as shown in FIG. "variation storage area", "first storage area" corresponding to the normal symbol variation game that is performed after the currently varying normal symbol variation game is completed, hereinafter referred to as "second storage area", "third storage area" and a "fourth storage area", and when the currently fluctuating normal symbol variation game finishes the variation, it is stored in the "variation storage area" and in the "first storage area". Determination information (random value) is transferred, the determination information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "first storage area", and the "third storage area" is transferred to the "second storage area". The determination information (random value) stored in the "area" is transferred, the determination information (random value) stored in the "fourth storage area" is transferred to the "third storage area", and the "fourth storage area" is transferred. becomes empty.

The first starting port 21 is provided in the central part of the game area 7, and when the game ball is shot to the left side of the game area 7, so-called "left hitting", the game ball enters. It is possible, and when the so-called "right-handed" is performed, the game ball cannot be entered. In addition, it is always open upwards and always allows game balls to enter. Then, when a game ball enters the first start hole 21 and is detected by the first start hole detection SW 21a, for example, "3" game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the reserved storage area is empty, special symbol hit determination processing is performed, the special symbol and decorative symbol image and the fourth symbol image to be described later are variably displayed, and after the fluctuation time has passed, the special symbol hit determination process is determined. A “symbol variation game” for deriving (determining and displaying) results (special symbols and decorative symbols) is executed.

When a game ball further enters the first start port 21 while the pattern variation game based on the ball entering the first start port 21 is being performed, execution of the symbol variation game based on the entered ball is suspended. A maximum of "4" can be reserved except for the symbol variation game being executed.

Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a reserved storage area for the symbol variation game, and as shown in FIG. area", a "first storage area" corresponding to the symbol variation game to be played after the currently varying symbol variation game is finished, and hereinafter, a "second storage area" and a "third storage area"; It is configured with a "fourth storage area". Then, when the pattern variation game that is currently fluctuating in a state where the determination information (random value) is stored in all of the reserved storage areas is completed, the "variation storage area" The stored determination information (random value) is transferred, the determination information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "first storage area", and the "second storage area" is stored in the " The determination information (random value) stored in the "third storage area" is transferred, the determination information (random value) stored in the "fourth storage area" is transferred to the "third storage area", and the "fourth storage area" is transferred. storage area is empty. Although the first starting port 21 is a ball-entering port through which a game ball can enter, it may be configured as a passage area through which a game ball can pass.

A starting port light emitting device 21 a is provided around the first starting port 21 . When the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the starting hole light emitting device 21a emits light to notify that the ball has entered, or when performing the holding prefetch effect described later, the target of the pending prefetch effect. It is possible to emit light in the same color as the color of the pending icon (or the variable icon). As a result, for example, even if the pending icon (or the variable icon) is temporarily hidden (for example, during super reach), the suspended icon (or the variable icon) hidden from the luminescent color of the starting port light emitting device 21a ) can be recognized. In addition, the starting hole light emitting device 21a is capable of emitting light in the same color as the color of the pending icon (or the variable icon) when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21. Even when the game ball enters the second starting hole 22, it may emit light in the same color as the color of the pending icon (or the variable icon).

The second starting port 22 is provided in the right central part of the game area 7, and when the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area 7, so-called "right hitting", the game ball enters. It is possible, and the game ball cannot be entered when so-called "left hitting" is being performed. In addition, unlike the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22 is not always open upward, and in principle does not allow entry of game balls (it is in a "closed" state). That is, the second starting port 22 has a protruding member that can protrude forward, and only when this protruding member protrudes forward ("open" state), the game ball can enter. It becomes possible.

Regarding whether or not to allow the game ball to enter the game ball by projecting the protruding member forward, when it is determined that the normal symbol hit is determined in the normal symbol hit determination process, the "opening and closing of the second start port" in FIG. It is possible to open and close in the opening and closing mode indicated by ". Then, when a game ball enters the second start hole 22 and is detected by the second start hole detection SW 22a, for example, "2" game balls are paid out as prize balls. is empty, the symbol variation game is executed.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 22 while the pattern changing game based on the ball entering the second starting port 22 is being performed, execution of the symbol changing game based on the entering ball is suspended. A maximum of "4" can be reserved except for the symbol variation game being executed. Since the specific configuration of the main RAM 103 related to suspension is the same as that of the first start port 21 described above, description thereof will be omitted.

As the second starting opening 22, a protruding member movable in the front-rear direction is used, but a so-called "electric tulip" having movable wing pieces may be used. Further, the second starting port 22 is a ball-entering port through which game balls can enter, but may be configured as a passage area through which game balls can pass.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22, the special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the special symbol, the decorative symbol image and the fourth symbol image are variably displayed. Then, after the variation time elapses, the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process (special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image) is derived (confirmed display). , Sometimes simply referred to as "game of 1 variation". Also, the execution of the "symbol variation game" may be referred to as "variation display".

Further, when one game ball enters the first starting port 21, the first special symbol display device 27a and the image display device 26 display "symbol variation" based on the entry of one game ball. "Game" is executed, and when one game ball enters the second starting port 22, the second special symbol display device 27b and the image display device 26 indicate that one game ball has entered. Based on the "symbol variation game" is executed. Therefore, the "symbol variation game" is a generic term for games played on the first special symbol display device 27a and the image display device 26, and also by the second special symbol display device 27b and the image display device 26. It refers to the generic name of the game that is played.

In addition, in the present embodiment, deriving the determination result (special symbol and decorative symbol image and fourth symbol image) of the special symbol hit determination process after the variation time in the symbol variation game has passed means (special symbol and decoration This is called "confirmed display" of the symbol image and the fourth symbol image). "Confirmed display" is a state in which the special symbol, the decorative symbol image and the fourth symbol image are completely stopped. On the other hand, in the symbol variation game, temporarily stopping the decorative symbol image before the variation time elapses is referred to as "temporary stop display" of the decorative symbol image. As an example of the "temporary stop display", when deriving the left and right decorative pattern images when it is "reach" described later, or the special pattern written as "pseudo" that suggests the execution of the pseudo-run described later and "shake fluctuation display" before "fixed display". "Shake fluctuation display" before "fixed display" means, for example, that the decorative pattern image is "temporarily stopped" at "767" or the like, and then "fixedly displayed" at "767", or once " ``Temporary stop display'' for the display of the failure of ``767'', and after performing a reversal effect to derive ``777'', ``777'' is ``confirmed display'', or variable display performed at the branch point. be done.

The normal winning openings 23 are provided in the lower left of the game area 7 with "3" and "1" in the lower right, totaling "4". A game ball can be entered when so-called "left-handed" is being played (balls cannot be entered when "right-handed"), and "1" normal winning openings 23 at the lower right are so-called A game ball can be entered when "right-handed" is being played ("left-handed" is not allowed). In addition, the normal prize winning opening 23 is always open upward like the first starting opening 21, and always permits entry of game balls. When a game ball enters the normal winning hole 23 and is detected by the normal winning hole detection SW 23a, for example, "8" game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the arrangement position of the normal winning openings 23 can be arbitrarily changed, and the number thereof may be less than "4". Also, the number of prize balls may be different between the "3" normal winning holes 23 on the lower left and the "1" normal winning holes 23 on the lower right.

The big winning opening 24 is provided in the lower right part of the game area 7, and a game ball can be entered when a so-called "right shot" is performed (a game ball cannot be entered when a "left shot" is performed). ing. The big winning opening 24 has an opening/closing door, and when a hit is determined in the special symbol winning determination process, a winning game is executed and the opening/closing door tilts forward to allow entry of a game ball. do. When a game ball enters the big winning hole 24 and is detected by the big winning hole detection SW 24a, for example, "12" game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In the winning game, the opening/closing door of the big winning opening 24 is opened (tilted forward) over the number of rounds (R) shown in FIG. Then, it opens (tilts forward) for 29.5 seconds (S=seconds) per round, and when the entrance of 10 game balls is detected by the big winning hole detection SW 24a before 29.5 seconds have passed, 29 .Even before 5 seconds have elapsed, the opening/closing door will be closed to proceed to the next round, and this will be repeated for the prescribed number of rounds. On the other hand, when 29.5 seconds (so-called "attacker full open") elapses before 10 game balls are detected by the big winning hole detection SW 24a, the opening/closing door is closed to proceed to the next round. Become. In this case, one round game ends without reaching 10 balls, which is the prescribed number of entering balls per round, which is disadvantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, an opening/closing door that tilts forward is used as the big prize opening 24, but a so-called "electric tulip" may be used, or a "shutter member" that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction may be used. good. Also, the game area 7 may have a plurality of large winning openings.

The image display device 26 has a display area over substantially the entire area, is provided so as to be positioned above the stage 17, and can display a symbol variation game and effect images in the display area. That is, based on the fact that the game ball entered the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 and the special symbol hit determination process was performed, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26a were displayed. The pattern image 26c is varied (vertically scrolled) in the variable display area. In addition, even when the game ball enters the first start port 21 and the game ball enters the second start port 22, the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26a are common. The pattern image 26c is fluctuated (vertically scrolled) in the variable display area (the special pattern display device is different, but the decorative pattern image used in the image display device 26 is common).

Then, the performance image is displayed within the variable time, and when the variable time passes, if the winning is achieved, for example, "7" is stopped in each decorative design image, and the combination of "777" decorative designs is displayed as a fixed display. By letting it run, it is notified that it is a hit. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, for example, the combination of the decorative symbols "765" is displayed as a confirmation to notify that the game is a loss.

Separately from each decorative design image, a fourth design image 26d (the "fourth" design next to the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c) is displayed on the right side of the display area. It can be displayed in the lower part, and in synchronism with each decorative pattern image, variable display and fixed display are possible. In addition, the image display device 26 displays a first start opening pending number image 26e that displays the number of holdings of the symbol variation game at the first start opening 21 as "0" to "4", and a symbol variation at the second start opening 22. A second starting opening pending number image 26f displaying the number of pending games as ``0'' to ``4'', and a first starting opening displaying the number of pending symbol variation games in the first starting port 21 with a suspended ball image. 1st holding ball image display area 26g, 1st starting opening 2nd holding ball image display area 26h, 1st starting opening 3rd holding ball image display area 26i, 1st starting opening 4th holding ball image display area 26j (Fig. 4, simply indicated as 'g', 'h', 'i', 'j'), the second starting port 1 that displays the number of pending symbol variation games in the second starting port 22 with a pending ball image. A reserved ball image display area 26k, a second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, a second starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26m, a second starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26n (in FIG. 4 are simply indicated as "k", "l", "m", and "n"). Also, a variation icon display area 26o (simply indicated as "o" in FIG. 4) for displaying an icon image corresponding to the symbol variation game currently being executed can be displayed.

What is the number of reservations displayed in the first starting opening reserved number image 26e and the number of reservations displayed in the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j? Synchronously, the number of reservations displayed in the second starting opening reserved number image 26f and the number of reservations displayed in the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26n Synchronize with numbers. For example, when "4" is displayed in the first starting opening reserved number image 26e, "4" is displayed in the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. is displayed.

The number of reservations displayed as the first starting opening reservation number image 26e and the number of reservations displayed as the second starting opening reservation number image 26f may be hereinafter referred to as "number reservation". In addition, the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26i, the first starting opening fourth reserved ball image The reserved ball image displayed in the display area 26j, the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, the second starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26m , and the held ball image displayed in the second starting port fourth held ball image display area 26n may be referred to as a "holding icon" below. Further, the icon image displayed in the variable icon display area 26o may be hereinafter referred to as "the variable icon". Also, the variable icon and the suspended icon may be collectively referred to simply as an "icon".

In addition, the variation icon display area 26o, the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26i, the first Starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j, second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, second starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26m, Although the second starting port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n is displayed on the image display device 26, it is not limited to this, and may be displayed on an LED, a lamp, or the like. may be displayed on another display device (for example, a second image display device, a so-called "sub-liquid crystal").

The left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, the right decorative design image 26c, and the fourth design image 26d can display design images from "1" to "8", and are used for the special design hit determination process. If the judgment result is a hit, any combination of symbols "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "a77", and "888" can be displayed. is.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, it is possible to display a combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols described above. In the case of a loss, when a special symbol variation pattern with "reach" is determined in the special symbol variation patterns described later, for example, a combination of symbols such as "767" is confirmed and displayed, and a special pattern without "reach" is displayed. When the symbol variation pattern is determined, for example, a combination of symbols such as "765" will be definitely displayed.

The combination of symbols confirmed and displayed in the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c is the same combination of symbols as the combination of symbols confirmed and displayed in the fourth design image 26d. For example, when "777" is confirmed and displayed with the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c, the fourth design image 26d also confirms and displays "777", and the left decorative design image 26a and the middle decorative design image 26c are displayed. When "767" is fixedly displayed on the decorative design image 26b and the right decorative design image 26c, "767" is also fixedly displayed on the fourth design image 26d.

"Reach" means that the left decorative design image 26a and the right decorative design image 26c are displaying the same number image (temporary stop display), and the middle decorative design image 26b is being variably displayed (temporary stop display). The symbol image to be displayed and the symbol image to be displayed in a variable manner are not limited to this), and in this embodiment, if the determination result of the "special symbol hit determination process" is a win, be sure to go through "reach" Since it is configured as above, it can be said that the player can expect a winning game.

The fourth pattern image 26d may simply display a one-digit number, may display a two-digit number, or may display a symbol or a character, instead of the combination of the above-described patterns. Alternatively, it may be possible to distinguish hits, losses, and types of patterns from differences in luminescent colors.

The pattern display device 27 is provided outside the game area (outside the outer rail member 18), which is an area different from the game area 7 of the game board 6. As shown in FIG. As also shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 displays a first special symbol which is controlled by the main control board 100 to execute a symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 21. A display 27a and a second special symbol display 27b for executing a symbol variation game based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 22 are provided. The first special symbol display device 27a and the second special symbol display device 27b are composed of a 7-segment display device. When it comes to the timing of blinking and deriving the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process, if it is a loss, "-" (horizontal bar symbol) is displayed (confirmed display), and if it is a hit, for example, "7" is displayed. Lights up (confirmed display). In other words, the “special pattern” refers to a pattern whose display is controlled by the main control board 100 .

In this embodiment, the "special design", the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, the right decorative design image 26c, and the fourth design image 26d are simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". Sometimes I say. Also, the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c managed by the effect control board 200 may simply be referred to as "decorative design". Also, the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, the right decorative design image 26c, and the fourth design image 26d managed by the effect control board 200 may be collectively referred to as "sub-designs".

As shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of suspensions of the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 21. A first special symbol suspension display 27c and a second special symbol suspension display 27d for displaying the number of suspensions of the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22 are provided. .

1st special design reservation indicator 27c, and 2nd special design reservation indicator 27d are each configured with two dot LED indicators, "turn off", "turn on", "flashing" by the number of can be displayed. For example, if the number of pending is '0' then both dot LED indicators are 'off', if the number of pending is '1' then one is 'on' and the other is 'off'. If the number of pending is "2", both are "lighted", and if the number of pending is "3", one is "lighted" and the other is "blinking", and the number of pending When it is "4", both are "blinking".

The first special symbol reservation display 27c includes the number of reservations displayed as the above-described first starting opening reservation number image 26e, and the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth reserved ball. In principle, the number of reservations displayed in the image display area 26j is synchronized (except when a command error or the like occurs), and the second special symbol reservation indicator 27d is the above-described second starting opening reservation number image 26f. In principle, the number of reservations displayed is synchronized with the number of reservations displayed as the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26n (command error, etc. (unless it occurs). For example, when the first special symbol reservation display 27c both "blinks" (when the number of reservations is four), "4" is displayed as the first start opening reservation number image 26e, and the first start opening number "4" held ball images are displayed in the 1 held ball image display area 26g to the first start opening fourth held ball image display area 26j. In the following description, the first special symbol reservation display 27c and the second special symbol reservation display 27d may be referred to as "main reservation display".

In addition, although the 1st special design reservation indicator 27c and the 2nd special design reservation indicator 27d were each constituted by two dot LED indicators, it is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device whose display is controlled by the main control board 100 may be provided and displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 has a normal symbol display device which is controlled by the main control board 100 to execute a normal symbol variation game based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20. 27e is provided. The normal symbol display device 27e is composed of two dot LED display devices, and in the normal symbol variation game, from the start of variation, one is lit and the other is extinguished, one is extinguished and the other is lit. When it comes to the timing of deriving the determination result of the normal symbol hit determination process by repeatedly executing the mode of causing and the mode to cause, and when it comes to the timing of deriving the determination result of the normal symbol hit determination process, a final display is performed by lighting one if it is a loss and turning off the other. is turned off and the other is turned on.

Further, the symbol display device 27 is provided with a normal symbol holding display 27f which is controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the number of suspensions of the normal symbol variation game based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20. ing. In addition, the normal design reservation display device 27f, like the above-described first special design reservation display device 27c and the second special design reservation display device 27d, is composed of two dot LED indicators, and the number of reservations Since the display mode of is also the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the symbol display device 27 is provided with a round indicator 27g which is controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the "number of rounds (see FIG. 6)" indicating the number of openings of the big winning opening 24 in the winning game. It is The round indicator 27g is composed of "2" dot LED indicators for 5 rounds and 10 rounds, respectively. Then, for example, when the special pattern A wins, the LED display for 10 rounds lights up, and the others go out, and when the special pattern B hits, the LED display for 5 rounds. lights up and the others go out.

A plurality of board illumination devices 29 (for example, full-color LEDs) are provided on the game board 6, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko game machine is activated by emitting light in a predetermined light emission pattern. It enhances the decorativeness of 1. For example, the board illumination device 29 can decorate the entire game area 7 of the game board 6, as indicated by reference numeral 29 in FIG. Moreover, in order to make the display contents of the image display device 26 stand out, all the panel illumination devices 29 can be turned off. Further, the predetermined light emission pattern is composed of a plurality of light emission patterns that define the light emission speed, the color of light emitted, the LEDs that emit light and the LEDs that do not emit light, and the like.

On the right side of the image display device 26 (so-called "center accessory"), a first special symbol sub-reserving display 29a and a second special symbol sub-reserving display 29b as one aspect of the board lighting device 29, A right-handed indicator 29c is provided. The first special symbol sub-reserving display device 29a and the second special symbol sub-reserving display device 29b are display-controlled by the effect control board 200, and each consist of two dot LED displays. It is possible to display the number of pending by "lighting" and "blinking". For example, if the number of pending is '0' then both dot LED indicators are 'off', if the number of pending is '1' then one is 'on' and the other is 'off'. If the number of pending is "2", both are "lighted", and if the number of pending is "3", one is "lighted" and the other is "blinking", and the number of pending When it is "4", both are "blinking".

The first special symbol sub-reserved display device 29a includes the number of reservations displayed as the first starting opening reserved number image 26e, and the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth reserved ball image. The number of reservations displayed in the display area 26j is, in principle, synchronized (except when a command error or the like occurs), and the second special symbol sub-reservation display 29b is displayed as the second start opening reservation number image 26f. In principle, the number of reservations displayed as the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26n is synchronized (a command error or the like occurs (unless For example, when both the first special symbol sub-reservation display 29a "blinks" (when the number of reservations is four), "4" is displayed as the first start opening reservation number image 26e, and the first start opening "4" held ball images are displayed in the first held ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth held ball image display area 26j. In the following, the first special symbol sub-suspension display 29a and the second special symbol sub-suspension display 29b may be referred to as "sub-suspension display".

Although the first special symbol sub-reserving display device 29a and the second special symbol sub-reserving display device 29b are each configured with two dot LED displays, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image may be displayed on a display device other than the image display device 26 (for example, a second image display device, a so-called "sub-liquid crystal").

The right-handed display 29c is display-controlled by the effect control board 200, for example, it lights up based on the reception of the opening command in the winning game, for example, the game state designation command (probability variable), the game state designation command (time saving A, B) is received, and the light is turned on. As a result, the player can be urged to hit to the right. On the other hand, in the normal game state, it is turned off (turned off based on the reception of the game state designation command (normal)), thereby prompting the player to hit left. The right-handed display 29c is extinguished so as to urge the player to play left-handed. It is also possible to encourage the player to hit left.

Next, based on FIG. 4, the internal configuration (block diagram of the control system) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. It should be noted that the description of the configuration of the game board 6 in FIG. 3 will be omitted as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a main control board 100, an effect control board 200, a payout control board 300, and a power supply board 400 on the rear side of the middle frame 3. The main control board 100 and the production control board 200 are connected to each other through a harness or the like (not shown) so that only one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the production control board 200 is possible. ing. Also, the main control board 100 and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness or the like so as to enable two-way communication. Also, the payout control board 300 is connected to the effect control board 200 so that only one-way communication is possible. In addition, the power supply board 400 receives supply of external power via a power plug (not shown), and sends the supplied external power to any of the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 300. It is connected so that it can be supplied

The main control board 100 is connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. so that inputs from various switches are possible, and it is possible to perform display control on various displays and drive control on various solenoids. are connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc., respectively. In addition, the production control board 200 is connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. so that input from various SW is possible, and a harness or They are connected via a relay board or the like.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs control processing related to the progress of the game, a main ROM 102 that stores a control program necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game, and a main ROM 102 that stores a control program necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game. A main RAM 103 is provided, which is readable and writable. Although not shown, it also includes an interrupt controller circuit that gives an interrupt signal to the main CPU 101, a hard random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and the like. It should be noted that control processing relating to the progress of the game in the main CPU 101 will be described in detail later with reference to flowcharts.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area (not shown) for managing various information. For example, a set value storage area for storing set value information, a special symbol state flag storage area for storing a special symbol state, a game state storage area for storing a game state, a winning state storage area for storing a state in a winning game, A normal design state flag storage area for storing the state of the normal design, and a normal design per state storage area for storing the state in the normal per design game.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a counter (see FIG. 9) for managing various information (time and number of times). For example, the normal game state, the game number counter for activating the time saving game state B for counting (counting and storing) the number of times the symbol variation game was played in the time saving game state A, the symbol variation game in the time saving game state (A, B) Time-saving game state game number counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times played, probability variable game state game number counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times pattern variation games were played in the probability variable game state, various A time management counter for managing time, a round number counter for managing the number of rounds in winning games, a count memory for the number of out balls, a count memory for the number of safe balls, and the number of difference balls (out balls) number-safe ball count).

The game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B starts counting from the start of the time-saving game state A after the end of the winning game, and even if the time-saving game state A ends and shifts to the normal game state, the counter value is inherited. It has become. For example, the counter value is "0" at the start of the time-saving game state A after the end of the winning game, and the counter value is "100" when the time-saving game state A ends and shifts to the normal game state. . Then, when the counter value is determined to be "898 (time-saving game state 100 + normal game state 798)" in step S105-4-11-8 of the game state-specific processing described later, the processing is affirmed. .

The number-of-games counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B may count the number of games only in the normal gaming state. That is, when the time-saving game state A ends and shifts to the normal game state, the counter value is "0", and the counter value is "798 ( If it is determined that the normal game state 798)”, the process may be affirmed.

The gate detection SW 20 a is provided inside the passage opening of the gate member 20 of the game board 6 and is a SW for detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20 . In other words, the gate detection SW 20a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the passage of the game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Become. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) that has input the detected information does not execute the normal symbol variation game in the normal symbol reservation display 27f, and the variation storage area for normal symbols to the fourth storage area. If the determination information (random value) is not stored in any of them, control is performed immediately to execute the normal symbol variation game. , the execution of the normal pattern variation game is suspended, and when determination information (random number value) is stored up to the fourth storage area, the execution of the normal symbol variation game is not suspended.

The first starting opening detection SW21a is provided inside the winning opening of the first starting opening 21 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 21. That is, the first starting hole detection SW21a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when a game ball is detected to enter, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. will be Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has received the detected information, causes the payout control board 300 to pay out three game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the first starting port 21. process.

Further, when an input is made from the first starting port detection SW 21a, the main control board 100 does not execute the symbol variation game on either the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b. , If the determination information (random value) is not stored in any of the variation storage area to the fourth storage area for the special symbol (first start port), immediately, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display 27a Control to execute the game, for example, if the determination information (random value) is stored up to the third storage area, control to suspend the execution of the symbol variation game, the determination information up to the fourth storage area ( random number) is stored, the execution of the symbol variation game is not suspended.

The second starting opening detection SW22a is provided inside the winning opening of the second starting opening 22, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 22. That is, the second starting hole detection SW22a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when a game ball is detected to enter, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. will be Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has received the detected information, causes the payout control board 300 to pay out two game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the second starting port 22. process.

Further, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) executes the symbol variation game on both the first special symbol display device 27a and the second special symbol display device 27b when an input is made from the second starting port detection SW 22a. If the determination information (random value) is not stored in any of the variation storage area to the fourth storage area for the special symbol (second start port), immediately, the second special symbol display device In 27b, control is performed to execute the symbol variation game. For example, when determination information (random number value) is stored up to the third storage area, control is performed to suspend the execution of the symbol variation game, and the fourth storage area. If the determination information (random number value) is stored up to, control is performed so as not to suspend the execution of the symbol variation game.

The second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b is provided behind the second starting port 22, and is a solenoid for causing the projecting member provided in the above-described second starting port 22 to perform an opening/closing operation. That is, the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 22b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. When the determination is made, the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b is drive-controlled so as to open and close in the opening/closing mode shown in FIG.

The normal winning hole detection SW23a is provided inside the winning hole of the normal winning hole 23 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23. In other words, the normal winning hole detection SW 23a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the detected information is input to the main control board 100 when a game ball is detected to enter. will be Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which receives the detected information, causes the payout control board 300 to pay out 8 game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the normal winning hole 23. process.

The big winning hole detection SW 24 a is provided inside the big winning hole 24 and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 24 . In other words, the big winning hole detection SW 24a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the detected information is input to the main control board 100 when a game ball is detected to enter. will be Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which receives the detected information, causes the payout control board 300 to pay out 12 game balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the big winning hole 24. process. In addition, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101 ) transmits to the effect control board 200 a special prize winning command indicating that a game ball has entered the special prize opening 24 . As a result, the effect control board 200 can also recognize the entry state of the game ball into the big winning hole 24 .

The large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 24b is provided behind or to the side of the large winning opening 24, and is a solenoid for opening and closing the opening/closing door provided in the large winning opening 24 described above. That is, the main control board 100 and the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 24b are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) opens and closes over the number of rounds shown in FIG. In order to open and close the door, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 24b is driven and controlled.

The out detection SW 25a enters the first start hole 21 and is detected by the first start hole detection SW 21a, and enters the second start hole 22 and is detected by the second start hole detection SW 22a. A game ball enters the normal winning hole 23 and is detected by the normal winning hole detection SW 23a. A game ball enters the big winning hole 24 and is detected by the big winning hole detection SW 24a. The game ball enters the out hole 25. It is provided at the downstream position of the flow path where game balls are collected. In other words, the game ball detected by these detection switches and the game ball entering the out port 25 can be detected.

The out detection SW 25a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the detected information is input to the main control board 100 when an entry of a game ball is detected. . Thereby, the number of out balls can be grasped in the main control board 100 . In addition, an out detection SW may be provided in the out port 25, and the game balls detected by the out detection SW may be counted as the number of out balls.

When the main control board 100 receives the information that the game ball is detected from the out detection SW 25a, it updates the number of out balls and the number of difference balls in the limit management counter described above. For example, when one game ball is detected by the out detection SW 25a, the number of out balls is incremented by "1", and the difference number of balls is calculated using the number of out balls after the update and the number of safe balls.
On the other hand, when the information that the game ball is detected is input from the first start hole detection SW21a, the number of safe balls in the limit management counter described above is updated. In this case, "3" corresponding to the winning ball of the first starting port 21 is added to the number of safe balls, and the difference number of balls is calculated with the number of safe balls after the addition. After that, when the information that the game ball is detected is input from the second starting hole detection SW22a, "2" corresponding to the winning ball of the second starting hole 22 is added to the number of safe balls, and the game ball is detected from the normal winning hole detection SW23a. is input, the number of safe balls is incremented by "8" corresponding to the prize balls in the normal winning hole 23. is added with "12" corresponding to the winning ball in the big winning hole 24, and the number of difference balls is calculated by the number of safe balls after the addition.

It should be noted that updating the number of difference balls using the number of out balls is an example, and the number of difference balls may be updated using the number of shot balls. For example, an SW capable of detecting game balls fired by the shooting device 305 may be provided to count the number of shot balls, or an SW may be provided at a portion of the inner rail member 19 closest to the play area 7 to count the number of shot balls. may be counted.

The first special symbol display device 27a is provided in the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is used to execute a symbol variation game based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 21. is an indicator of That is, the first special symbol display 27a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the symbol variation on the first special symbol display 27a. When the game execution condition is established, the display of the symbol variation game is controlled on the first special symbol display device 27a. It should be noted that when the condition for executing the symbol variation game on the first special symbol display 27a is established, the affirmative determination is made in the processing of step S105-2-4 in the "special symbol variation start time processing" (see FIG. 21) described later. case applies.

The second special symbol display device 27b is provided in the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is used to execute a symbol variation game based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 22. is an indicator of That is, the second special symbol display 27b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the symbol fluctuation on the second special symbol display 27b. When the game execution condition is established, the display of the symbol variation game is controlled on the second special symbol display 27b. It should be noted that the fulfillment of the execution condition of the symbol variation game on the second special symbol display 27b means that the affirmative determination is made in the processing of step S105-2-1 in the "special symbol variation start processing" (see FIG. 21). Applicable.

The first special symbol suspension display 27c is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100 to indicate suspension of the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 21. A display for displaying numbers. That is, the first special symbol holding display 27c and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 detects the game ball from the first starting opening detection SW21a. , the display control of the first special symbol reservation indicator 27c is performed (turned off to light or turned on to flash) when the upper limit value (four pieces) of the hold is not reached. On the other hand, when the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the currently varying first start port 21 is completed, the display control of the first special symbol reservation indicator 27c is performed (from blinking to lighting, or from lighting to extinguished). cause).

The second special symbol suspension display 27d is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100 to indicate suspension of the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 22. A display for displaying numbers. That is, the second special symbol holding display 27d and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 detects the game ball from the second starting opening detection SW 22a. is input, when the upper limit value (four pieces) of the reservation is not reached, the second special symbol reservation indicator 27d is displayed and controlled (turned off to light, or lighted to blink). On the other hand, when the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the currently varying second starting port 22 ends, the second special symbol holding display 27d is displayed and controlled (from flashing to lighting, or from lighting to extinguished). cause).

The normal symbol display 27e is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display for executing a normal symbol variation game whose display is controlled by the main control board 100. FIG. That is, the normal symbol display 27e and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) executes the normal symbol variation game on the normal symbol display 27e. When the condition is satisfied, the normal symbol variation game is displayed and controlled on the normal symbol display 27e.

The normal symbol suspension display 27f is provided in the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and displays the number of suspensions of the normal symbol variation game based on the game ball passing through the gate member 20. It is a display for In other words, the normal symbol holding display 27f and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) receives the information that the game ball is detected from the gate detection SW 20a. When inputting, when the upper limit value (four pieces) of the reservation is not reached, the display of the normal design reservation indicator 27f is controlled (lighted from light or blinked from light). On the other hand, when the currently fluctuating normal symbol variation game ends, the display of the normal symbol reservation display 27f is controlled (from flashing to lighting or from lighting to extinguished).

The round display device 27g is provided in the pattern display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is a display device for displaying the number of openings of the big winning opening 24 in the winning game described above. In other words, the round indicator 27g and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. For example, when the symbol variation game determined as winning in the special symbol winning determination process ends, the first special symbol At the timing of displaying a special symbol (for example, "7") indicating a win on the display 27a, the lighting of the LED indicator of the number of rounds corresponding to the determined winning game is controlled. When the winning game is being executed, the round indicator 27g is continuously controlled to turn on, and when the winning game ends, the round indicator 27g is controlled to go out.

The magnetic sensors 27h are provided at a plurality of locations on the game board 6 and are sensors for detecting magnetism. That is, the magnetic sensor 27h and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like. It will be input to the control board 100 . Thereby, abnormal magnetism can be detected in the main control board 100 . Then, when the abnormal magnetism is detected, the information indicating the detection of the abnormal magnetism (magnetism abnormality error designation command) is transmitted to the effect control board 200 . Thereby, it is possible to notify that an abnormal magnetism has been detected.

The radio wave sensors 27i are provided at a plurality of locations on the game board 6 and are sensors for detecting radio waves. That is, the radio wave sensor 27i and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like. It will be input to the control board 100 . Thereby, an abnormal radio wave can be detected in the main control board 100 . Then, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the information indicating the detection of the abnormal radio wave (error designation command for radio wave abnormality) is transmitted to the effect control board 200 . This makes it possible to notify that an abnormal radio wave has been detected.

The production control board 200 is provided with a production control unit 200a. It has a sub RAM 203 capable of reading and writing required in the performance control process. In addition, an image/sound control unit 200b connected to the performance control unit 200a via a harness or the like so as to enable two-way communication is provided. a sound ROM 205 for storing sound data; a CGROM 206 for storing image data; and a VRAM 207 having a frame buffer for storing image generation data and the like. Further, there is provided a light emission drive control section 200c which is connected to the production control section 200a via a harness or the like so as to enable two-way communication. a light emission drive CPU 208 that performs light emission control processing, a light emission drive ROM 209 that stores a control program necessary for the light emission control processing and the drive control processing, and a light emission drive RAM 210 that is capable of reading and writing necessary for the light emission control processing and the drive control processing. have.

Further, the effect control section 200a is connected so that operation information from the effect button detection SW 14a, operation information from the effect lever detection SW 15a, and operation information from the cross key detection SW 16a can be input.

The effect button detection SW 14a is provided in the effect button 14, and is a SW for detecting that the effect button 14 is pressed by the player when the effect button 14 is in the operation valid period. That is, the effect button detection SW 14a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed is input to the effect control board 200. there is Then, the effect control board 200 that receives the information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed controls the effect corresponding to the depression of the effect button 14 via the image display device 26 and the speaker 10 . Here, for the effect button 14, for example, in a symbol variation game, an operation valid period is set for a predetermined time, and the effect button detection SW 14a detects only depression when the operation valid period is set.

The production lever detection SW 15a is provided in the production lever 15, and is a SW for detecting that the production lever 15 is operated by the player when the production lever 15 is in the operation valid period. That is, the production lever detection SW 15a and the production control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the production lever 15 is operated is input to the production control board 200. there is Then, the effect control board 200 that receives the information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated controls the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect lever 15 via the image display device 26 and the speaker 10 . Here, for the effect lever 15, for example, in a symbol variation game, an operation valid period is set for a predetermined period of time, and the effect lever detection SW 15a detects only operations when the operation valid period is set.

The cross-key detection SW 16a is provided on the cross-key button 16, and is a SW for detecting that the cross-key button 16 has been pressed by the player. That is, the cross key detection SW 16a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the cross key button 16 has been operated is input to the effect control board 200. ing.

As described above, by operating the cross key button 16, it is possible to adjust the amount of light emitted from the light emitting device 9, the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26, and the volume emitted from the speaker 10. Specifically, when the up button of the cross key button 16 is pressed, the amount of light can be increased (stepwise), and when the down button of the cross key button 16 is pressed, the amount of light can be decreased (step by step). When the right button of the cross key button 16 is pressed, the volume can be increased (stepwise), and when the left button of the cross key button 16 is pressed, the volume can be lowered (step by step).

The amount of light may be set in three stages of "strong", "medium", and "weak", or may be further divided into five stages. In addition, the volume may be set in three stages of "high", "medium", and "low", or may be set in five subdivided stages. Further, the image display device 26 may display a level gauge image indicating the degree of adjustment of the amount of light and the sound volume, and the speaker 10 may emit an adjustment sound according to the level. For example, when configuring the degree of volume adjustment in five stages, the adjustment sound corresponding to the lowest volume value level 1 is "do", and the adjustment sound corresponding to volume value level 2 is "re♪". The adjustment sound corresponding to level 3 may be "mi♪", the adjustment sound corresponding to volume value level 4 may be "fa♪", and the adjustment sound corresponding to maximum volume value level 5 may be "so♪". Note that the adjustment sound may be output with a volume value corresponding to the volume value level. For example, "re♪" may be output with a louder volume value than "do♪".

It should be noted that the level gauge image may be displayed in a manner that matches the level of the amount of light or the volume, or may be displayed in a constant manner regardless of the level of the amount of light or the volume. Specifically, the display mode in accordance with the amount of light and the volume level is, for example, the size (display area) of the level gauge image indicating the volume level 1, and the volume level 2, which is larger than the volume level 1. It is assumed that the size (display area) of the level gauge image indicating is displayed to be large. On the other hand, the constant display mode regardless of the amount of light or the volume level is assumed to be a display in which the size (display area) of the level gauge image does not change whether the volume level is 1 or 2.

It should be noted that the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value level may emit a sound such as "beep♪" at any level, and the volume value may be varied for each step. Specifically, when the volume level is 1, a sound "beep" is emitted at a volume value corresponding to the volume level 1, and when the volume level is 2, a volume value corresponding to the volume level 2 (more than the volume level 1) It is assumed that the sound "beep" is emitted at a large volume value).

In this embodiment, the adjustment of the amount of light and the adjustment of the sound volume can be performed when the symbol variation game is not being played. good. In this case, it is preferable to adjust by not displaying the level gauge image and emitting the adjustment sound, or by displaying it in a small size and outputting the adjustment sound at a low volume. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect image and the effect sound corresponding to the symbol variation game from being hindered by the level gauge image and the adjustment sound.

Also, it may be possible to adjust the amount of light and the sound volume during execution of the winning game. In this case, the display control of the level gauge image and the output control of the adjustment sound may be performed in the same manner as the above-described case where the light amount adjustment and the sound volume adjustment are performed when the symbol variation game is not performed. In addition, display control of the level gauge image and output control of the adjustment sound may be performed in the same manner as the adjustment of the amount of light and the adjustment of the sound volume during the symbol variation game.

Although the above-described level gauge image is displayed on the image display device 26, if a display device other than the image display device 26 is provided, the image may be displayed on the other display device. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display content displayed on the image display device 26 from being obstructed by the display of the level gauge image.

When the light amount is adjusted, the level gauge image may be displayed, but the adjustment sound may not be output.

An image display device 26 is connected to the image/sound control unit 200b, and image information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b can be displayed. A speaker 10 is connected to the image/sound control unit 200b so that sound information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b can be output.

The speaker 10 can output music (BGM), voice, and sound effects. For example, when information indicating the closed state is not input from the frame open detection SW 3a, which will be described later, a notification sound is output to indicate that the middle frame 3 is in the open state. That is, the speaker 10 and the image/sound control unit 200b are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the sound described above is output from the speaker 10 under the control of the image/sound control unit 200b.

The light emission drive control section 200c is also connected to the light emission device 9, the starting port light emission device 21a, and the board illumination device 29, so that light emission can be controlled by the light emission drive control section 200c. A board drive device 30 is connected to the light emission drive control section 200c, and the movable body 28 can be driven and controlled via the board drive device 30. FIG.

The movable body 28 is provided on the game board 6 and is capable of actions such as "falling", "rocking", and "rotating". By performing these actions, it suggests the possibility that a winning game will be awarded.

Further, when the movable body 28 receives the power-related subcommand, it confirms whether the above-described "dropping", "swinging", "rotating", etc. operations are performed normally in front of the display area of the image display device 26. It is designed to perform the initial operation for In the initial operation, the movable body 28 moves to the front of the display area of the image display device 26, so that the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see for a certain period of time due to the movable body 28. FIG. In addition, even if the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see due to the initial operation, other members (for example, the starting port light emitting device 21a, the first special symbol holding display 27c, the second special symbol holding display 27d, board illumination device 29, etc.) will not become difficult to see due to the initial movement of the movable body 28.

Although not shown, it also includes an interrupt controller circuit that gives an interrupt signal to the sub CPU 201, a hard random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and the like.

The payout control board 300 includes a payout CPU 301 that performs payout control processing, a payout ROM 302 that stores a control program necessary for the payout control processing, and a payout RAM 303 that is capable of reading and writing necessary for the payout control processing. ing. A payout device 304 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like. By controlling the payout device 304, game balls are paid out to the upper tray 5a.

Specifically, in the main control board 100, for example, when the information that the game ball is detected from the first start hole detection SW21a is input, payout control from the main control board 100 so as to pay out three prize balls A payout command signal is transmitted to the board 300, and the payout control board 300 receiving this controls the payout device 304 to pay out three prize balls to the upper tray 5a. When the payout of the three prize balls is completed, a payout completion signal is transmitted from the payout control board 300 to the main control board 100, and the information that the game ball is detected is inputted from the first start hole detection SW21a. Complete the payout of game balls for

Also, the discharge control board 300 is connected to the firing handle 8 via a harness or the like, and the firing handle 8 is gripped when the player touches the above-described handle touch sensor provided on the firing handle 8. The amount of rotation of the firing handle 8 is input according to the amount of the firing volume (not shown) provided on the firing handle 8 .

Also, the payout control board 300 is connected to a launcher 305 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the launcher 305 , game balls are launched into the game area 7 . Specifically, the payout control board 300 receives information that the player is gripping the shooting handle 8 from the shooting handle 8 and inputting the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 8 , and the shooting corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 8 . The intensity controls the shooting device 305 to shoot the game ball.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 300 is connected to receive an input signal from the ball lending button 12 shown in FIG. When the lending button 12 is operated by the player, the payout control board 300 controls the payout device 304 to provide a number of game balls (for example, 125 balls) corresponding to one operation of the lending ball button 12. It is adapted to be dispensed to the upper receiving tray 5a.

The frame open detection SW3a is provided on the middle frame 3, and is used when the glass frame 4 is opened, when the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are opened, or when the middle frame 3 is opened. It is possible to detect the "open" state, such as, and to detect the "closed" state when the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are closed. In other words, the frame open detection SW 3a and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating the closed state is input to the payout control board 300 in the above-described "closed" state. will be On the other hand, when it is in the above-described "open" state, the information indicating the above-described closed state is not input to the payout control board 300, and by not inputting, the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) is in the above-described "open" state. can be detected to be in Note that the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) can transmit information detected to be in the "closed" state and information detected to be in the "open" state to the effect control board 200.

Between the upper receiving tray 5a and the lower receiving tray 5b, a passage is formed for guiding game balls that cannot be stored in the upper receiving tray 5a to the lower receiving tray 5b, and a full tank detection SW 300a is provided in the passage. there is When the game balls guided to the lower receiving tray 5b are stored without being discharged (to the outside of the game machine), the game balls stop in the aisle, and when a predetermined amount of game balls stop, the full tank detection SW 300a turns ON. . As a result, it is possible to detect that the lower receiving tray 5b is also full of game balls. When the full tank detection SW 300a is turned on, the payout CPU 301 stops the game ball payout by the payout device 304, and transmits information indicating that the full tank detection SW 300a is on to the effect control board 200. there is As a result, in the effect control board 200, it is possible to perform notification prompting discharge of the game balls stored in the lower receiving tray 5b.

The main control board 100, the performance control board 200, and the payout control board 300 are connected to the power supply board 400 via harnesses or the like, and as described above, external power is supplied via a power plug (not shown). In response, the supplied external power is supplied to any of the main control board 100, the performance control board 200, and the payout control board 300. Although not shown, the power supply board 400 is provided with a conversion circuit or the like for converting external power (AC 100 volts) to DC 24 volts.

Next, the special symbol hit determination table and the normal symbol hit determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5A is stored in the main ROM 102 . Here, in the present embodiment, six levels of setting values can be set, and FIG. 5A shows an example of a special symbol hit determination table for setting value 1, and description of other setting values is omitted. are doing. For example, when 1 is set as the set value, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol hit determination table for the set value 1 shown in (A) to perform the special symbol hit determination process, and 6 is set as the set value. When it is set, the special symbol winning determination process is performed with reference to a special symbol winning determination table for set value 6 (not shown). In addition, common to the first start port and the second start port means that even if the game ball enters the first start port 21, even if the game ball enters the second start port 22, the special symbol to be referred to It shows that the decision table is common. Note that the set value is not limited to "6" stages, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, "4" stages or "2" stages may be used.

Alternatively, the machine may be provided with only the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 5(A) without providing the setting value (it may be a machine without setting).
Also, although setting values are provided, only the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5(A) may be provided. That is, there is no problem even if the game machine has only one level of set values, and the contents of the main control board main processing shown in FIGS. Also, even if only one stage of setting values is provided, there is no problem even if the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 14 and the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 15 are performed. In this way, processing and the like can be shared between a game machine with multiple stages of setting values (setting-equipped machine) and a gaming machine with only one-level setting value (substantially, a setting-uninstalled machine). It can reduce developer effort.
Also, when only one level of set values is provided, there is no problem in using the same main control board 100 as that of the game machine with multiple levels of set values (hardware may also be shared). In this way, members can also be shared, so costs can be reduced.

In the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5 (A), when the game state is the normal game state and when it is the time saving game state A, B, the probability that it is determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process. is "1/319", the probability that it is determined to be lost is "318/319", and when the game state is a variable game state, the probability that it is determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process With "1/32", the probability of being judged to be lost is "31/32". That is, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the probability of being determined to be hit varies about 10 times than the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state A, B, so the probability variation gaming state is the normal gaming state It can be said that this game state is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game states A and B.

In addition, in the special symbol hit determination table for the set value "6" (not shown), when the game state is the normal game state and when it is the time-saving game state A, B, hit in the special symbol hit determination process The probability of being determined is "1/280", the probability of being determined to be lost is "279/280", and when the game state is a probability variable game state, the special symbol hit determination process The probability of being judged is "1/28", and the probability of being judged to be unsuccessful is "27/28". In this way, by enabling different hit probabilities to be set for each set value, it becomes easier for the amusement arcade to manage the put-out balls.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming states A and B and the variable probability gaming state, as compared to the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 5 (B) and FIG. Since it is easy to win and an advantageous opening/closing mode is selected as the opening/closing mode of the protruding member of the second starting port 22 when winning a normal figure, the variable probability game state is the most advantageous game state for the player. Next, the time-saving game states A and B are game states advantageous to the player, and the normal game state is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper limit of the time saving game state A is 100 times, and the upper limit of the time saving game state B is 1212 times. It is an advantageous playing state for

In this embodiment, the gate member 20 is provided on the right side of the game area 7 and not provided on the left side of the game area 7, as shown in FIG. If, in the normal game state, the game ball is hit to the right and the game ball is passed through the gate member 20, as shown in FIG. The protruding member can be opened, but since the opening time is "0.9 s", it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start hole 22, and most of the game balls that are hit out the out hole 25. will pass through. Therefore, in the normal game state, hitting to the left and entering the game ball into the first start hole 21 is the optimum game for the player. Therefore, when the gate detection SW 20a detects a game ball in the normal game state, a left-handed notification is given to prompt the player to play an optimum game.

In the following, the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming states A and B may be collectively referred to as low probability states, and the variable probability gaming states may be referred to as high probability states. In addition, the normal gaming state is sometimes referred to as non-variable or short-variable state, and the probability variable gaming state and time-saving gaming states A and B are collectively referred to as variable-shortening or variable-shortening state. , It may be said that the ball entry rate is improved.

Next, the normal symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5B is stored in the main ROM 102 . Then, when the game state is the normal game state, the probability that it is determined to be a normal pattern hit in the normal symbol hit determination process is "4/256", and the probability that it is determined to be a normal pattern loss is "252/256". And, when it is a time-saving gaming state A, B, and when it is a probability variation gaming state, the probability that it is determined to be a normal pattern hit in the normal pattern hit determination process is "251/256", and the normal pattern The probability of being judged as losing is "5/256". Therefore, in the case of the time-saving game state A, B and the variable probability game state, it is easier to determine that the normal pattern hit is determined by the normal symbol hit determination process, and the game is advantageous for the player. It can be said that it is a state. In addition, although the set value is not provided in the normal symbol hit determination table (the set value is common), the set value may be provided in the same manner as the special symbol hit determination table. For example, the set value "6" may be easier to hit the normal pattern in the normal pattern hit determination than the set value "1". In addition, in the normal game state, the probability of being determined to be a normal pattern hit in the normal pattern winning determination process was set to "4/256", and the probability of being determined to be a normal pattern loss was set to "252/256". It is good also as "256/256" not only in this but the probability determined as normal figure loss.

Next, a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table will be described with reference to FIG. First, the special symbol determination table of FIG. 6(A) is a result of the special symbol hit determination processing being performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 21, and is a hit and a miss. (1) The table for the first start port 21 and the game ball entered the second start port 22, which is referred to when determining the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 27a. As a result of the special symbol hit determination processing being performed based on, it is referred to when determining the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the second special symbol display device 27b depending on whether it is a hit or a loss (2) A table for the second starting port 22 and a table for the second starting port 22 are stored in the main ROM 102 . Then, the main CPU 101 refers to the table corresponding to the starting hole into which the game ball entered, and determines the special symbol based on the determination result of the special symbol winning determination process.

In the special symbol determination table of (1) in FIG. 6A, as a result of performing the special symbol hit determination process, if the result is a hit, the main CPU 101 selects "special symbol A", "special symbol B", " Any one of the special symbols is determined from among the special symbols C'. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and any special symbol is determined by referring to the acquired random number for special symbol determination. . For example, if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "0 to 9", "special symbol A" is determined, and if the random number for determining the acquired special symbol is "10 to 64", "special symbol B" is determined. is determined, and if the acquired random number for special symbol determination is "65 to 99", "special symbol C" is determined. Then, when the special symbols are determined, the "number of rounds" and the "game state after winning" are uniquely determined. When the "special symbol A" is determined, 10 rounds are given as the "number of rounds", and a probability variation game state is given as the "game state after winning". When the "special symbol B" is determined, 5 rounds are given as the "number of rounds", and a probability variation game state is given as the "game state after winning". When the "special symbol C" is determined, 10 rounds are given as the "number of rounds", and the time-saving game state A is given as the "game state after winning". On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines a "special symbol D", and the "special symbol D" contains the "number of rounds" and the "game state after winning". ” is not defined, a winning game is not provided.

In the special symbol determination table of (2) in FIG. 6(A), as a result of performing the special symbol winning determination process, if the result is a winning, the main CPU 101 selects from "special symbol E" and "special symbol F", Determine one of the special symbols. A specific determination method is the same as (1) in FIG. Then, if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "0 to 64", "special symbol E" is determined, and if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "65 to 99", "special symbol F" is determined. to decide. When the "special symbol E" is determined, 10 rounds are given as the "number of rounds", and a probability variation game state is given as the "game state after winning". When the "special symbol F" is determined, 10 rounds are given as the "number of rounds", and the time-saving game state A is given as the "game state after winning". On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol win determination processing is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol G".

Thus, the rate at which the probability variation gaming state is given is the first start port 21 "65%", the second start port 22 is also "65%", so the rate of entering the probability variation gaming state , there is no difference between the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22 . On the other hand, as for the "number of rounds", 10 rounds are always given to the second start port 22, and 5 rounds are never given, so a winning game is given based on the ball entering the first start port 21. It can be said that giving a winning game based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 22 is more advantageous for the player. In this embodiment, no set value is provided in the special symbol determination table, but a set value may be provided. For example, when the set value is "1" and when the set value is "6", the determination ratio of the special symbols may be different. In that case, the rate of entry into the variable probability gaming state is common for all set values, but the "number of rounds" may be set differently for each set value. For example, the number of advantageous rounds may be more likely to be given when the set value is "6", or the number of more advantageous rounds may be more likely to be given when the set value is "1".

Thus, it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded a winning game based on the ball entering the second starting hole 22 than to be awarded a winning game based on the ball entering the first starting hole 21.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the time-saving game states A and B and the probability variable game state where the second start port 22 can be opened at "1.8S x 3 times", the game ball is hit to the right and the game ball is sent to the second start port 22. is the optimum game for the player. Therefore, when the first start hole detection SW21a detects a game ball in the time-saving game states A and B or the variable probability game state, a right-handed notification prompting the player to play an optimum game is performed.

Next, the normal symbol determination table in FIG. 6B is stored in the main ROM 102, and as a result of the normal symbol hit determination processing performed based on the game ball passing through the gate member 20, the normal symbol hit It is a table to be referred to when determining a normal symbol to be fixedly displayed on the normal symbol display 27e, depending on whether the normal symbol is lost or when the normal symbol is lost. When the game state is the normal game state, and as a result of performing the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol related process "normal symbol A ”, and if it is a normal pattern loss, determine “normal pattern B”. In addition, the main CPU 101, when the game state is the time-saving game state A, B and when it is the variable probability game state, as a result of performing the normal symbol hit determination process, when the normal symbol wins, the normal symbol "Normal symbol C" is determined in the normal symbol determination process performed in the related process, and "normal symbol D" is determined when the normal symbol is lost.

It should be noted that, in the normal symbol as well, the content to be provided is uniquely determined, similar to the above-described special symbol. When "normal pattern A" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting port 22 opens "1" time at "0.9S", and when "normal pattern B" is determined, the second starting port 22 projecting member does not open. Further, when the "normal symbol C" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting port 22 is opened "3" times at "1.8S", and when the "normal symbol D" is determined, the second The projecting member of the starting port 22 does not open. Therefore, the opening and closing mode of the protruding member of the second start port 22 is advantageous in the case of the normal game when the time saving game state A, B or the variable probability game state is more advantageous than the normal game state. Therefore, it can be said that the game state is advantageous for the player.

In addition, although the setting value is not provided in the normal symbol determination table, the setting value may be provided similarly to the special symbol determination table. For example, for each set value, the probability that it is determined to be a normal pattern hit in the normal pattern hit determination process may be different, and in the case of the set value "6", it is easier to hit than in the case of the set value "1". It may be, or vice versa. Moreover, the opening/closing mode of the second starting port 22 may be different for each set value. For example, in the case of the set value "6", it may be opened and closed in an opening and closing manner that is more advantageous than in the case of the set value "1", or vice versa.

Next, FIG. 6(C) shows the details of the round for each winning special symbol. Open 29.5 seconds per round and repeat this 10 times. Also, when the number of rounds is "5" (special symbol B), the big winning opening 24 is opened for "29.5 seconds" per round, and this is repeated five times.

Next, the game state transition (game flow) in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, as described above, the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the probability variation game state are provided. Strictly speaking, the time-saving game state includes a time-saving game state A and a time-saving game state B.

In the normal game state, the state managed by the main control board is a low probability state, and the general electric support is "none". The general electric support means that it is easy to hit the general pattern in the normal pattern hit determination process, and if you win, the opening and closing of the second start port shown in FIG. 6 will be "1.8S x 3 times". . Also, in the production control board, production mode A to production mode E can be executed as production modes (also referred to as production stages).

In the time-saving gaming state A, the state managed by the main control board is a low-probability state, and the general electric support is "present". In the time saving game state A, the upper limit number of times is 100 times. In other words, one of the end conditions is that the symbol variation game has been played 100 times. Moreover, in the production control board, the production mode F can be executed as the production mode.

In the time saving game state B, the state managed by the main control board is a low probability state, and the general electric support is "present". In addition, the time saving game state B has an upper limit of 1212 times. In other words, one of the end conditions is that the symbol variation game has been played 1212 times. Moreover, in the production control board, the production mode G can be executed as the production mode.

Probability variation gaming state, the state managed by the main control board is a high probability state, and the general electric support is "yes". In addition, the probability variation gaming state has an upper limit of 10000 times. In other words, one of the end conditions is that the symbol variation game has been played 10,000 times. Moreover, in the production control board, the production mode H can be executed as the production mode.

In the winning game, the state managed by the main control board is a low probability state, and the general electric support is "none".

In the time-saving game state A, the upper limit number of times is set to 100 times, but the number of times may be less than 100 times or more than 100 times.
In addition, in the time-saving gaming state B, the upper limit number of times is set to 1212 times, but if the number of times is 3.8 times or less of the denominator (for example, 319) of the probability of winning in the special symbol hitting determination table, it may be any number of times. .

In addition, together with the time-saving game states A and B described above, or instead of the time-saving game states A and B described above, a time-saving game state C may be provided. This time-saving game state C is a time-saving game state that can be shifted in part when it is not determined to be hit in the special symbol hit determination process in the normal game state. For example, the time saving game state C may be shifted to about 1/500. Incidentally, the combination of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C may be arbitrary. For example, the time saving game state A and B may be provided and the time saving game state C may not be provided, or the time saving game state A and C may be provided and the time saving game state B may not be provided, The time saving game states B and C may be provided, and the time saving game state A may not be provided, or all of the time saving game states A, B, and C may be provided.

In addition, although the upper limit number of times is set in the variable probability gaming state, the upper limit number of times may not be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, a so-called variable probability loop type is used, but a so-called ST type or a falling lottery type may also be used.

In the case of the ST type, a special symbol (for example, ST 100 times) to which the probability variation gaming state is given, and a special symbol (for example, ST 100 times + 100 times of short working hours).

Next, the game state transition will be described.
a: It is a transition when it is determined as hit in the special symbol hit determination process.
b: A transition when any one of the special symbols A, B, and E is determined.
c: This is a transition when it is determined as hit in the special symbol hit determination process.
d: Transition when either special symbol C or F is determined.
e: This is a transition when it is determined as a win in the special symbol win determination process.
f: This is the transition when the symbol variation game is executed 100 times in succession without winning.
g: This is the transition when the symbol variation game is executed 898 times in succession without winning in the time-saving game state A and the normal game state.
h: This is the transition when the symbol variation game is executed 1212 times in succession without winning.
i: This is a transition when it is determined as hit in the special symbol hit determination process.
j: This is the transition when the symbol variation game is executed 10,000 times in succession without winning.

In addition, g is 898 times, but if the number of times is 2.5 times or more and 3.0 times or less of the denominator (for example, 319) of the hit probability in the special symbol hit determination table, it can be set to any number of times. good.
Also, the number of times in g is a fixed value that cannot be changed, but an arbitrary value may be set by a game store clerk.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern table will be described with reference to FIG.
The special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 8 is stored in the main ROM 102 and is a table referred to when determining the variation time in the symbol variation game.

When the game state is the normal game state, the main CPU 101 selects any one of "variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern 8" when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is loss. Determining fluctuation patterns. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22, obtain a random number for determining the variation pattern, and refer to the obtained random number for determining the variation pattern. , determine the variation pattern. In addition, when the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22, a random number for reach determination is acquired, and if the random number for reach determination corresponds to the random number for executing reach, " Determine one of the variation patterns from "variation pattern 3" to "variation pattern 8", and if the random number for reach determination does not correspond to the random number for executing reach, select "variation pattern 1" or "variation pattern 2". You may make it decide. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal game state, the main CPU 101 refers to the random number for determining the variation pattern when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is that the game wins. One of the fluctuation patterns is determined from among the "variation patterns 15".

Then, when the variation pattern is determined, the “details of presentation” and the “variation time” (seconds S) are uniquely determined. When "variation pattern 1" is determined, "reduced variation" is determined as the "description content" and "2S" is determined as the "variation time." "Shortening variation" refers to variation that does not result in reach and stops the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c at the same time. When "variation pattern 2" is determined, "normal variation" is determined as the "description", and "7S" is determined as the "variation time". "Normal variation" refers to a variation that does not result in reach and stops the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c in order. When "variation pattern 3" is determined, "normal reach" is determined as the "description" and "15S" is determined as the "variation time". "Normal reach" refers to a reach that does reach, but does not perform a special development effect (for example, once a temporary stop display is performed due to a failure, and then a change in the middle decorative pattern image 26b), and selection of winning time. Since the ratio is low and the selection ratio at the time of loss is high, it is positioned as a reach with low expectations for winning.

When "variation pattern 4" is determined, "super reach 1" is determined as the "description" and "40S" is determined as the "variation time". "Super reach 1" refers to a reach in which a development effect is performed during reach (normal reach) execution, and a real image is displayed on the image display device 26 at the development destination, for example, and the selection ratio at the time of winning is " It is higher than "Normal Reach" and the selection rate at the time of losing is lower than "Normal Reach", so it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation than "Normal Reach". When "variation pattern 5" is determined, "super reach 2" is determined as the "description", and "50S" is determined as the "variation time". "Super reach 2" refers to a reach in which a development effect is performed during the execution of reach (normal reach), and a real image is displayed on the image display device 26 at the development destination, for example, and the selection ratio at the time of winning is " It is higher than "Normal Reach" and the selection rate at the time of losing is lower than "Normal Reach", so it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation than "Normal Reach". The degree of expectation for winning may be the same as that of "super reach 1", or the degree of expectation for winning may be higher than that of "super reach 1".

When "fluctuation pattern 6" is determined, "pseudo run 2 normal reach" is determined as the "effect content", and "30S" is determined as the "variation time". "Pseudo consecutive" will be described in detail later, but "pseudo consecutive 2 normal reach" has a higher expectation than "normal reach" alone, and a reach with a lower expectation than "super reach 1, 2" is positioned as When "variation pattern 7" is determined, "pseudo run 3 super reach 1" is determined as the "effect content", and "70S" is determined as the "variation time". "Pseudo-ream 3 super reach 1" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than only "super reach 1". When "variation pattern 8" is determined, "pseudo run 3 super reach 2" is determined as the "effect content", and "80S" is determined as the "variation time". “Pseudo-ream 3 super reach 2” is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than only “super reach 2”. "Variation pattern 9" to "Variation pattern 14" are different from "Variation pattern 3" to "Variation pattern 8" only in losing or winning.

When "fluctuation pattern 15" is determined, "full rotation reach" is determined as the "description", and "120 seconds" is determined as the "variation time". "Full rotation reach" means that the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c are set to "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", and "666". , "777", and "888" are scrolled (variably displayed) at a low speed, and finally displayed as "777".

In addition, the selectable variation pattern in the case of winning may be defined by the determined special symbol. For example, the variation patterns 9 to 14 can be selected even if any of the special symbol A, the special symbol B, and the special symbol C is determined, and the variation pattern 15 is selected when the special symbol A is determined. It is possible to select as many as possible. Moreover, even if any of the special symbols A, B, and C is determined, the variation patterns 9 to 15 may be selectable.

The main CPU 101, when the game state is the time-saving game state A, B and when it is the variable probability game state, as a result of the special symbol hit determination processing, if it is a loss, "variation pattern 16" ~ One of the fluctuation patterns is determined from among the "variation patterns 21". When "variation pattern 16" is determined, "ultra-shortened variation" is determined as the "description content", and "1S" is determined as the "variation time". When "variation pattern 17" is determined, "reduced variation" is determined as the "description", and "2S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, when the game state is the time-saving game state A, B, and when it is the probability variable game state, as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, it is lost and the number of reserved balls is 1 to In the case of 3, this "ultra-shortening variation" and "shortening variation" are likely to be selected, so that the time-saving gaming states A and B and the probability variation gaming state can be efficiently digested. In addition, "fluctuation pattern 16" may be executed only in the time-saving game state B. Thereby, the time-saving game state B having a larger upper limit than the time-saving game state A can be efficiently digested.

When "variation pattern 18" is determined, "regular variation" is determined as the "description", and "7S" is determined as the "variation time". When the "fluctuation pattern 19" is determined, the "description content" is determined to be "Reaching", and the "variation time" is determined to be "10S". The "ready-to-win" means, for example, temporarily stopping and displaying the "7" symbol as the left decorative design image 26a, and by inciting whether or not to temporarily stop-display the 7 symbols as the right decorative design image 26c, thereby forming the reach. It is a production that arouses whether or not it will be done. As a result of "ready-to-win", for example, when 8 symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, no ready-to-win is formed, and for example, when 7 symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c. A reach is formed, and it develops into a “variable short medium super reach” in “variation pattern 20” to “variation pattern 23” described later.

When "variation pattern 20" is determined, "variable short medium super reach 1" is determined as the "effect content", and "30S" is determined as the "variation time". "Variable and short-time super reach 1" is a "super reach" dedicated to the time-saving game state and probability variable game state, and is different from "super reach 1, 2" performed in the normal game state.

When "Variation Pattern 21" is determined, "Variable Short Super Reach 2" is determined as the "Production Details", and "40S" is determined as the "Variation Time". In addition, "Variable Short Medium Super Reach 2" may have the same degree of expectation as "Variable Short Medium Super Reach 1", or may have a higher expected degree of success than "Variable Short Medium Super Reach 1". may be positioned. "Variation pattern 22" and "Variation pattern 23" are different from "Variation pattern 20" and "Variation pattern 21" only in losing or winning, and the contents of the effect and the variation time are the same, so the explanation is omitted. . When "fluctuation pattern 24" is determined, "sudden hit" is determined as the "description", and "20S" is determined as the "variation time". The "sudden hit" is an effect in which "777" is suddenly temporarily stopped and displayed after that, without going through the reach. It should be noted that the "fluctuation pattern 24" may be executed only in the time-saving gaming state B. Thereby, the time-saving game state B having a larger upper limit than the time-saving game state A can be efficiently digested.

The special symbol variation patterns described above are not limited to those shown in FIG. 8, and may further include a plurality of special symbol variation patterns. Also, the special symbol variation pattern table to be referred to may be changed depending on the set value. For example, a special symbol variation pattern that is easy to select for each set value may be provided, or a special symbol variation pattern that can be selected only by the set value may be provided. As a result, it is possible to guess (or comprehend) what the set value is from the effect contents of the executed special symbol variation pattern, which leads to an improvement in game interest.

Also, although the special symbol variation pattern table to be referred to is common between the time saving game state A and the time saving game state B, it may be made different. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling as if a different game state is being executed while being in the same time-saving game state.

Next, (A) the determination information storage area of the main RAM and (B) the counter of the main RAM will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing a determination information storage area (reserved storage area) provided in the main RAM 103 and a counter of the main RAM. And (B) a reserved storage area corresponding to the normal symbol is provided. The determination information (random value) related to the special symbol can be stored in the "third storage area" and the "fourth storage area", respectively. , ``second storage area'', ``third storage area'', and ``fourth storage area'' can each store determination information (random number value) related to the special symbol. area", "first storage area", "second storage area", "third storage area", and "fourth storage area" can each store determination information (random value) relating to normal symbols. Note that the counter of the main RAM is as described above, so the description is omitted here.

Next, based on FIGS. 10 and 11, commands transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 will be described. 10 and 11, main commands are extracted, and some commands are omitted.

A "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the first special symbol reserved number, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when the first special symbol reserved number increases or decreases.

A "second special symbol storage specifying command" indicates the second special symbol reserved number, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when the second special symbol reserved number increases or decreases.

The ``performance pattern specification command'' indicates the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and is set in the main RAM 103 when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the performance control board. 200.

"Special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b, and the first special symbol display device 27a or It is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when the variable display of the special symbols is started on the second special symbol display 27b.

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed. , and transmitted to the effect control board 200.

"Normal symbol determination command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 27e. .

The "game number display update command" indicates the number of symbol variation games from the above-described predetermined timing, and the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b. It is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when the display is activated.

In this embodiment, the game number image 26q is displayed on the image display device 26 in the normal game state (see FIG. 54, etc.). For example, when the effect control board 200 receives a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, or a winning game ending designation command, it performs processing for displaying "0" as the number-of-games image 26q. When the symbol variation game is executed and the "game number display update command" is received, the game number image 26q is updated (displayed by adding 1).
Thus, by visually recognizing the game number image 26q displayed on the image display device 26 without visually recognizing the external information display device installed at the top of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the symbol variation game can be started from the above-mentioned predetermined timing. It is possible to recognize the number of executions of

The number-of-games image 26q is difficult to see in the time-saving gaming states A, B, and variable-probability gaming states. In particular, in the time-saving gaming states A and B, since the remaining number of times image 26s (see FIG. 59) indicating the number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state is displayed, it is understood that the game number image 26q is also displayed. Because it becomes difficult.

It should be noted that "difficult to see" may mean that the game number image 26q is not developed on any display layer, or that it is developed on the display layer but the display layer is difficult to view. In the latter case, the game count image 26q is updated every time the symbol variation game is executed, although the player cannot visually recognize it.

The "game number counter command" indicates the number of times the symbol variation game has been played in the normal game state and the time saving game state A, and the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b It is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the normal game state and the remaining number of symbol variation games until the time-saving game state B is activated become 100, the game number counter image 26p is displayed on the image display device 26 ( See FIG. 54, etc.). That is, the effect control board 200 performs processing for displaying the game number counter image 26p (for example, 100 more times) when the received "game number counter command" (the value of the counter) indicates "798". I do. After that, every time the "game number counter command" is received, the processing for updating the display of the game counter image 26p (decrement display by one) is performed.

That is, the number-of-games counter image 26p is not displayed until the number of symbol variation games remaining until the time-saving gaming state B is activated reaches 100, and the number of symbol variation games remaining until the time-saving gaming state B is activated. When it reaches 100, it will be displayed.
As a result, if the number-of-games counter image 26p is displayed all the time, there is a risk that the player will be absorbed in the game more than necessary, but such a situation can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the number-of-games counter image 26p is displayed when the remaining 100 is reached. Remaining 50, remaining 10...) may be displayed.
Further, hereinafter, the display of the number-of-games image 26q, the number-of-games-counter image 26p, and the number-of-games image 26s may be collectively referred to simply as the "number-of-games display".

The "start opening winning designation command" is for notifying the effect control board 200 in advance of the result of the hit determination. It is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 .

The "winning game opening designation command" indicates that a winning game starts, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when various winning games start.

The “round specification command” indicates the number of rounds of the winning game, is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when the round game of the winning game is started.

The “winning game ending designation command” indicates that the winning game ends, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when various winning games end.

"Normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of normal symbol reservations, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when the value stored in the normal symbol reservation number storage area increases or decreases. .

The "general design specification command" indicates the type of normal design to be stopped and displayed on the normal design display device 27e, and is stored in the main RAM 103 when various normal designs are determined and variable display of the normal design is started. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 200 .

The "ordinary figure variation specification command" indicates the variation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 27e, and is set in the main RAM 103 when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200. be done.

The "opening designation command for per normal pattern" indicates that the per normal per pattern game is started, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when the per normal pattern game is started.

"Ending designation command for per normal pattern" indicates that various per per normal pattern games end, and is set in the main RAM 103 when the per normal pattern game ends, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200. .

The "game state designation command" is whether it is a time saving game state, whether it is a high probability game state, if it is a time saving game state, whether it is a time saving game state A or a time saving game state B, It is set in the main RAM 103 at the start of the variation of the special symbols, the end of the variation of the special symbols (at the start of the winning game), and the end of the winning game according to each game state designation command. It is sent to the control board 200 . Each game state designation command will also be described in detail in the flow chart.

The "power-on designation command" and "power-restoration designation command" indicate whether power-on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 103. When the power is turned on, whether or not the main RAM 103 is initialized, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command corresponding to the game state are transmitted to the effect control board 200 .

In the present embodiment, processing for displaying "0" as the number-of-games image 26q is performed both when the "power-on designation command" and "power-restoration designation command" are received. As a result, for example, when the game parlor is opened, it is possible to prevent the number of executions of the symbol variation game before transitioning to the time-saving gaming state B from being easily found out.

When the "power supply restoration designation command" is received (when the main RAM 103 is not initialized), when the number of games image 26q is displaying the number of times before "898" (small number of times), time is saved. It may shift to game state B. For example, if the number of times the symbol variation game was executed at the closing time of the previous day was "100" and the main RAM 103 was not initialized, the game number image 26q displayed "798" times, and the time-saving game state was displayed. May move to B.

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed is set in the main RAM 103 when the customer waiting state is entered, and is sent to the effect control board 200. sent.

The "error designation command" indicates that an error has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 and the type of error, and is set in the main RAM 103 when it is determined that various abnormalities have occurred. sent.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that an error that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 has been eliminated, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the effect control board 200 when the elimination of various abnormalities is detected. be.

The "setting value specification command" indicates the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. After the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, specifically, a power-on specification command or a power restoration specification is executed. It is transmitted to the effect control board 200 after the command is transmitted, during execution of the setting change process, or during execution of the setting confirmation process.

The "set value changing command" indicates that the setting change process is being executed, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200 during execution of the setting change process (FIG. 14).
The "set value confirming command" indicates that the setting confirmation process is being executed, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200 during execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 15).
The "set value confirmation end command" indicates that the setting confirmation process has ended, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200 during execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 15).

"Limit function cancellation promotion command" is for prompting the initialization (clearing) of the main RAM 103, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200 during execution of the main control board main processing (Fig. 12).
"Limit management counter clear command" indicates that the limit management counter (the number of out balls, the number of safe balls, and the number of difference balls to be counted and stored) has been initialized (cleared), and the main control board main processing is executed. It is transmitted to the production control board 200 during (FIG. 12).

"Limit management counter (difference number of balls) command" indicates the value of the limit management counter (especially the current number of difference balls), and is transmitted to the effect control board 200 during execution of the limit management process (Fig. 26). be.

"Limit function operation start command" indicates that the limit function has been activated, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200 during execution of the limit management process (Fig. 26). The limit function will be explained in the limit management process of FIG.
The "fire stop command" is for stopping the operation of the firing device 305 (for example, turning off the firing solenoid), and is transmitted to the payout control board 300 during execution of limit management processing (FIG. 26).

Next, control processing performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will be described.

(Regarding main processing on the main control board)
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the main processing (1/2) performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG. This processing is started by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on and voltage is supplied from the power supply board 400 to each control board.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage (power outage state). As a result, if the power is interrupted (power outage state), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed, and if the power is not interrupted (power outage state), the process proceeds to step S2. When the power is interrupted (power outage state), the process can be executed using a backup power supply (not shown).

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 101 prohibits an interrupt (that the main control board timer interrupt processing is performed). As a result, the main CPU 101 executes only this process until the interrupt is permitted in step S24, which will be described later. Then, when the interrupt is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S3.

It should be noted that a firing stop signal (fire stop command) may be output after the process of step S2 is completed to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from being shot while interruption is prohibited. Then, in the first main control board timer interrupt processing after the interrupt is permitted in step S24, which will be described later, the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 101 initializes (clears) the limit management counter. Specifically, the number of out balls, the number of safe balls, and the number of difference balls counted and stored by the limit management counter of the main RAM 103 are initialized (cleared) to "0". The initial values of the number of out-balls and the number of safe-balls are not limited to "0" and may be any value, and the initial value of the number of safe-balls may be larger than the initial value of the number of out-balls. For example, the initial value of the number of out balls may be "0" and the initial value of the number of safe balls may be "100,000". As a result, it is possible to prevent a negative value from being calculated in the differential ball number calculation process, which will be described later, and to prevent problems from occurring in the program. After the limit management counter is initialized (cleared), the process proceeds to step S4.

(Step S4)
In step S<b>4 , the main CPU 101 transmits a limit management counter clear command to the effect control board 200 . As described above, the command indicates that the limit management counter (the number of out balls, the number of safe balls, and the number of difference balls to be counted and stored) has been initialized (cleared). By transmitting, it is notified that the limit management counter (the number of out balls, the number of safe balls, and the number of difference balls to be counted and stored) has been initialized (cleared) (see FIG. 72). As a result, the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made to recognize that the limit management counter has been initialized (cleared). Then, when the command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S5.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 105 is ON (depressed). That is, it is determined whether the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (the power switch 400a is turned on) while the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed. As a result, when the RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process proceeds to step S6, and when the RAM clear switch 105 is not ON, the process proceeds to step S13.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 101 determines whether the limit function is in operation. Specifically, the limit function operating flag that is turned ON in step S113-10 of the limit management process (FIG. 26) is checked, and if the flag is ON, it is determined that the limit function is operating. As a result, when the limit function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S7, and when the limit function is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 101 performs state return (limit function non-operation) processing. Specifically, the limit function operating flag is turned OFF to deactivate the operating limit function. That is, in order to cancel the operating limit function, it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the power switch 400a is turned on) while the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed. When the state restoration (limit function inactivation) processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is at the setting change position. For example, when it is detected that the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and that the setting change key is rotated by 90 degrees, it is determined that the setting change key is at the setting change position. If not, it is determined that the setting change key is not at the setting change position. As a result, when the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S9, and when the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 101 performs set value change processing shown in FIG. The processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 14 . Then, when the set value changing process is completed, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. The power-on command is a command indicating that the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on and the power is turned on. The device 26 displays the message "power is being turned on", and the speaker 10 outputs the voice "power is being turned on". Then, when the power-on command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S23.

(Step S11)
In step S11, when the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and the power switch 400a is ON, the main CPU 101 initializes areas 1 and 2 of the main RAM 103 (excluding the set value storage area). As a result, for example, if the game is in the time-saving game state (A or B) when the amusement arcade closes, it can be started from the normal game state when the amusement arcade opens the next day. In this process, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (the counter value is set to 0). After initializing the areas 1 and 2 of the main RAM 103 (excluding the set value storage area), the process proceeds to step S12.

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. Then, when the power-on command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S23.

(Step S13)
In step S13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the limit function is in operation, as in step S6. As a result, when the limit function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S14, and when the limit function is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S15.

(Step S14)
In step S<b>14 , the main CPU 101 transmits a limit function cancellation promotion command to the effect control board 200 . As described above, the command is for prompting the initialization (clearing) of the main RAM 103, and by sending the command to the effect control board 200, the initialization (clearing) of the main RAM 103 can be prompted. It is notified (see FIG. 72). This makes it easy for the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to understand the method of canceling the limit function. Then, when the command is transmitted, the processing remains until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (the power switch 400a is turned on) while the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed.

(Step S15)
In step S15, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is at the setting change position. As a result, when the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S16, and when the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S16)
In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. The processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 15 . Then, when the set value confirmation process is completed, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S17)
In step S17, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is backed up data. For example, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, a backup process (not shown) is performed to hold data, store a checksum, and turn on a backup flag. If the backup flag is ON, it is determined that there is backed up data, and if the backup flag is not ON, it is determined that there is no backed up data. As a result, when there is backed up data, the process proceeds to step S18, and when there is no backed up data, it is determined that the power is turned on for the first time, and the process proceeds to step S23.

(Step S18)
In step S<b>18 , the main CPU 101 calculates the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103 . After calculating the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S19.

(Step S19)
In step S19, the main CPU 101 determines whether the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103 is normal. For example, it is determined whether the checksum value stored in the backup process (not shown) matches the checksum value calculated in step S18. If they match, the checksum is determined to be normal. , the checksum is determined to be incorrect. As a result, when the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S21, and when the checksum is not normal, the process proceeds to step S20.

(Step S20)
In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs game stop processing (error setting). Specifically, an error command for performing error notification using the light emitting device 9, the speaker 10, the image display device 26, etc. is transmitted to the effect control board 200, or the setting value change processing of FIG. 14 is not performed. For as long as possible, a process is performed that makes it impossible to cancel the error. Then, the process remains as long as the set value change process of FIG. 14 is not performed.

(Step S21)
In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs return processing. That is, the state before the power failure state is restored normally. When the state before the power failure state is restored normally, the process proceeds to step S22.

(Step S22)
In step S22, the main CPU 101 transmits a power restoration command. The power restoration command is a command indicating that the RAM clear switch 105 has been turned off and the power has been restored. The device 26 displays "Power supply is being restored", and the speaker 10 outputs the voice "Power supply is being restored". Then, when the power restoration command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S23.

(Step S23)
In step S23, the main CPU 101 sets CTC. That is, the CTC (counter timer circuit), which has the function of creating a pulse output with a constant period and the function of time measurement, etc., is set so that the main control board timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically performed every 4 ms. , set the time constant register of the CTC. After setting the CTC, the process proceeds to step S24.

(Step S24)
At step S24, the main CPU 101 permits an interrupt. Then, when the interrupt is permitted, it waits, and after that, main control board timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed every 4 ms.

(Regarding setting value change processing)
FIG. 14 is a flow chart (subroutine of step S9 of the main control board main process) showing the set value changing process performed in the main control board 100. FIG. The state in which the processing in FIG. 14 is being performed corresponds to the "setting change state" described above.

(Step S9-1)
In step S9-1, the main CPU 101 initializes the area of the main RAM 103 (excluding the set value storage area). In this process, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (the counter value is set to 0). Then, after initializing the area of the main RAM 103 (excluding the set value storage area), the process proceeds to step S9-2.

In step S9-1, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (the counter value is set to 0), but each game number counter may not be cleared. As a result, it is possible to meet the needs such as wanting to change the set value but not wanting to clear each game number counter.

(Step S9-2)
In step S9-2, the main CPU 101 transmits a set value changing command. The setting value changing command is a command indicating that the setting value is being changed, and when the effect control board 200 receives the command, the image/sound control unit 200b, for example, an image display device 26 displays "setting is being changed", and the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "setting is being changed". Then, when the set value changing command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S9-3.

(Step S9-3)
At step S9-3, the main CPU 101 reads out the current set value and displays it on the display 104. FIG. For example, if the set value stored in the set value storage area of the main RAM 103 is "1", the display 104 displays "1". When the current set value is read out and displayed on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S9-4.

(Step S9-4)
In step S9-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a set value change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 105 is ON. If the RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if the RAM clear switch 105 is not ON, the process proceeds to step S9-7.

(Step S9-5)
At step S9-5, the main CPU 101 performs processing for changing the setting value. For example, when the set value is "1" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "2", and when the set value is "2" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "3", and when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON when the set value is "3", the set value is changed to "4", and when the set value is "4", the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on When it is turned ON, the set value is changed to "5", and when the set value is "5" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "6", and when the set value is "6" When the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON at this time, the set value is changed to "1". After changing the set value, the process proceeds to step S9-6.

(Step S9-6)
In step S9-6, the main CPU 101 displays the changed set value on the display 104 (for example, the rightmost segment). For example, if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON when the set value "1" is displayed, the set value "2" is displayed, and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON when the set value "2" is displayed. Then, the set value "3" is displayed, and if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "3" is being displayed, the set value "4" is displayed and the set value "4" is displayed. If the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value is displayed, the set value "5" is displayed, and if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "5" is displayed, the set value "6" is displayed If the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "6" is displayed, the set value "1" is displayed. Then, when the changed set value is displayed on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S9-7.

(Step S9-7)
At step S9-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a set value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting change key is at a position (vertical direction) rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from a position (horizontal direction) rotated clockwise 90 degrees. Then, if the setting value confirming operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S9-8, and if the setting value confirming operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S9-4.

(Step S9-8)
In step S9-8, the main CPU 101 stores the set value in the set value storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. That is, when a desired set value is displayed on the display 104 and the setting change key is turned counterclockwise by 90 degrees (vertical direction), the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is determined. become. As a result, subsequent games are played based on the stored set values. After the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S9-9.

(Step S9-9)
At step S9-9, the main CPU 101 makes the display 104 non-display. That is, the set value displayed on the display 104 in step S9-6 is hidden. When the display 104 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S9-10.

(Step S9-10)
At step S9-10, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value designation command. The setting value designation command is a command indicating information about the setting value. When the effect control board 200 receives the command, the effect control board 200 stores the information about the setting value in the sub-RAM 203, and executes a setting value suggesting effect described later. The setting value information stored in the sub RAM 203 is referred to. In addition, when the production control board 200 receives the command, it terminates the above-described notification such as "the setting is being changed". Then, when the setting value designation command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S10 of the main control board main process.

As described above, the setting value change process may be performed even when the setting value is provided in one stage. Well, in step S9-6, for example, if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "1" is being displayed, the set value "1" may be displayed. Also, in step S9-8, the set value "1" is already stored, but it may be updated and stored.

(Regarding setting value confirmation processing)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S16 of the main control board main process) showing the set value confirmation process performed in the main control board 100. FIG. The state in which the processing in FIG. 15 is being performed corresponds to the "setting confirmation state" described above.

(Step S16-1)
In step S16-1, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value checking command. The setting value checking command is a command indicating that the setting value is being checked. Upon receiving the command, the effect control board 200 performs image display via the image/sound control unit 200b, for example. The device 26 is displayed to indicate that "settings are being checked", and the speaker 10 is made to output a voice saying that "settings are being checked". Then, when the setting value checking command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S16-2.

(Step S16-2)
At step S16-2, the main CPU 101 reads out the current set value and displays it on the display 104. FIG. For example, if the set value stored in the set value storage area of the main RAM 103 is "1", the display 104 displays "1". When the current set value is read out and displayed on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S16-3.

(Step S16-3)
In step S16-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether an end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting change key is at a position (vertical direction) rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from a position (horizontal direction) rotated clockwise 90 degrees. Then, if the end operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S16-4, and if the end operation is not performed, the process is looped until the end operation is performed.

(Step S16-4)
In step S16-4, the main CPU 101 makes the display 104 non-display. That is, the set value displayed on the display 104 in step S16-2 is hidden. When the display 104 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S16-5.

(Step S16-5)
In step S16-5, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value confirmation end command. The setting value confirmation end command is a command indicating that the setting value confirmation process has ended, and when the effect control board 200 receives the command, the above-described notification such as "setting is being confirmed" is terminated. Then, when the setting value confirmation end command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S17 of the main control board main process.

Note that, as described above, the setting value confirmation process may be performed even when one level of setting values is provided. Also, if the machine does not have any setting values and is set as a non-setting machine, the processing in FIGS. 14 and 15 may be omitted.

(Regarding main control board timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main control board timer interrupt processing performed in the main control board 100 . This processing is executed by interrupting the above-described main control board main processing periodically (for example, every 4 ms).

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 101 saves information stored in the register. After saving the information stored in the register, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs time management processing for updating the timer used in the game (for example, opening time of the big winning opening 24, etc.). After updating the timer used in the game, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random numbers such as the random number for hit determination, the random number for determining the special symbol, and the random number for determining the variation pattern. When various random number updating processes are completed, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
At step S104, the main CPU 101 detects an input from each switch shown in FIG. The processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 17 . Then, when an input from each SW is detected, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to special symbols. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 20 . Then, when the process related to the special symbol ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to normal symbols. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20, the "normal symbol hit determination process" is performed, and the normal symbol determination and normal symbol fluctuation time are determined. Then, when the process relating to the normal symbol ends, the process proceeds to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to the payout of game balls. For example, in the input SW detection process of step S104, when the entry of a game ball is detected, a payout command signal is sent to the payout control board 300 to pay out the corresponding prize ball. A payout command signal is set in the command transmission area of , and a payout completion signal is received from the payout control board 300 . Then, when the process related to the payout of game balls is completed, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs abnormality determination processing. This processing will be described later in detail using FIG. 25 . After completing the abnormality determination process, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S<b>109 , the main CPU 101 performs processing of transmitting various commands to the effect control board 200 . For example, in this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether a command is set in the command transmission area provided on the main control board 100, and if the command is set, controls the effect of the set command. It is transmitted to the board 200 and the payout control board 300 . Then, when the command transmission process ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 101 controls display of special symbols (variation display and confirmation display) on the first special symbol display 27a when the symbol variation game is based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 21. ) is performed, and in the case of the symbol variation game based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22, display control (variation display and final display) of special symbols is performed on the second special symbol display 27b. Also, based on the fact that the game ball has entered each starting port and the symbol variation game in each starting port has ended, the first special symbol reservation display 27c and the second special symbol reservation display 27d is also displayed. Then, when the display control of the special symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol display control (variable display and fixed display) on the normal symbol display 27e. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20 and the fact that the normal symbol variation game has ended, the display control of the normal symbol reservation display 27f is also performed. Then, when the display control of the normal symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs game performance information management processing. Specifically, the game performance information is calculated by the above-described formula of "(the number of game balls paid out in the normal game state / the number of out balls in the normal game state) x 100", and the calculated game is displayed on the display device 104. Performs processing such as displaying performance information. When the game performance information management process ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs limit management processing. The processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 26 . When the limit management process ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 101 restores the information saved in step S101 to the register. Then, when the saved information is returned to the register, the main control board timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Regarding input switch detection processing)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process) showing the input switch detection process performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S104-1)
In step S104-1, the main CPU 101 performs a first start port detection process. The processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 18 . Then, when the process at the time of detection of the first starting port ends, the process proceeds to step S104-2.

(Step S104-2)
In step S104-2, the main CPU 101 executes second starting opening detection processing when information indicating that a game ball has been detected has been input from the second starting opening detection SW 22a. Note that this process will be described by replacing it with the second starting port 22 in FIG. 18 . Then, when the process at the time of detection of the second starting opening is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-3.

(Step S104-3)
In step S104-3, the main CPU 101 receives the information that the game ball has been detected from the normal winning hole detection SW 23a, and causes the payout control board 300 to pay out eight game balls as prize balls. A process of setting a payout command signal in a command transmission area for payout is performed. In addition, when a game ball enters the normal winning hole 23 in a winning game, a normal winning hole entrance ball detection signal is set in the command transmission area in order to perform ball entry notification using the speaker 10 and the image display device 26. . Then, when the normal winning hole detection process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-4.

(Step S104-4)
In step S104-4, when the main CPU 101 receives the information that the game ball has been detected from the big winning hole detection SW 24a, the main CPU 101 causes the payout control board 300 to pay out 12 game balls as prize balls. A process of setting a payout command signal in a command transmission area for payout is performed. Also, in order to notify that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 24 using the image display device 26 or the like, a big winning hole ball detection signal is set in the command transmission area. Notification using the image display device 26 or the like means that, for example, when more than 10 game balls per round are detected by the large winning opening detection SW 24a (also referred to as over winning), the image display device 26 notifies that fact. The notification may be given by display or by sound from the speaker 10 (for example, the sound of "pillin"). Then, when the big winning opening detection process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-5.
It should be noted that the notification of the over-winning is not limited to the sound of the speaker 10, but may be the light-emitting device 9, the display of a specific character on the image display device 26, or the production button 14. Alternatively, the production lever 15 may be vibrated by a vibrating device.

(Step S104-5)
In step S104-5, the main CPU 101 performs processing at the time of passage gate detection when the information indicating that the entry of the game ball has been detected is input from the gate detection SW 20a. Then, when the passage gate detection processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S104-6.

(Step S104-6)
In step S104-6, the main CPU 101 performs out detection processing. The processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 19 . Then, when the out-detection time processing ends, the processing shifts to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding processing when detecting the first starting port)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S104-1 of the input switch detection process) showing the first start opening detection process performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that the same processing is performed in the second starting opening detection process, so the first starting opening can be read as the second starting opening.

(Step S104-1-1)
At step S104-1-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the information indicating that the game ball has been detected has been input from the first starting opening detection SW 21a. Then, when the information that the game ball has been detected from the first starting hole detection SW21a is input, the processing is shifted to step S104-1-2, and the game ball entering is detected from the first starting hole detection SW21a. If the information has not been input, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input switch detection process.

(Step S104-1-2)
In step S104-1-2, the main CPU 101 pays out 3 game balls (2 balls in the case of the second start hole 22) as prize balls for the game balls entering the first start hole 21. In order to cause 300 to pay out, a prize ball command is set in the command transmission area for payout. Then, when the prize ball command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-1-3.

(Step S104-1-3)
In step S104-1-3, the main CPU 101 counts and stores the expected number of prize balls (safe balls) in the limit management counter. That is, if the ball enters the first starting port 21, "3" is counted and stored, and if the ball enters the second starting port 22, "2" is counted and stored. When the expected number of prize balls (safe balls) is counted and stored in the limit management counter, the process proceeds to step S104-1-4.

(Step S104-1-4)
In step S104-1-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the "fourth storage area" is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of pending symbol variation games at the first start port 21 is "4". If the "fourth storage area" is stored, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input switch detection process, and if the "fourth storage area" is not stored, step S104-1- 5 is processed.

(Step S104-1-5)
At step S104-1-5, the main CPU 101 acquires a random value for hit determination. The random number obtained in this process is used in the later-described winning determination process (step S104-1-9) and special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21). Then, when the hit determination random number value is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-1-6.

It should be noted that the acquisition of the hit determination random number value may be performed before step S104-1-4. Then, if it is determined in step S104-1-4 that the "fourth storage area" has been stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-6)
At step S104-1-6, the main CPU 101 acquires a special symbol determination random number value. The random number obtained in this process is used in the later-described winning determination process (step S104-1-9) and special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21). Then, when the special symbol determination random number value is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-1-7.

It should be noted that the acquisition of the special symbol determination random number value may be performed before step S104-1-4. Then, if it is determined in step S104-1-4 that the "fourth storage area" has been stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-7)
At step S104-1-7, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern. The random number obtained in this process is used in the later-described winning determination process (step S104-1-9) and special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21). Then, when the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-1-8.

Incidentally, acquisition of the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value may be performed before step S104-1-4. Then, if it is determined in step S104-1-4 that the "fourth storage area" has been stored, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-8)
In step S104-1-8, the main CPU 101 stores the hit determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number as determination information in an empty storage area. For example, if the "third storage area" is stored and the "fourth storage area" is empty, each random value is stored in the "fourth storage area". After each random value is stored in a free storage area, the process proceeds to step S104-1-9.

(Step S104-1-9)
At step S104-1-9, the main CPU 101 performs a winning determination process. This winning judgment process is a process for judging whether or not the random number obtained in step S104-1-5 is a hit prior to the special symbol winning judgment process in the special symbol variation start time process (see FIG. 21). be. As a result, for example, when the hit determination random number value stored in the "fourth storage area" in step S104-1-8 is a win, a notice effect (a "prefetch effect" to be described later) is performed across a plurality of fluctuations. can be executed. When the winning determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-1-10.

(Step S104-1-10)
In step S104-1-10, the main CPU 101 sets the first starting opening winning designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 200. FIG. The first start opening winning designation command also includes information on the determination result of the winning determination process in step S104-1-9, and the effect control board 200 receives the command, so that the winning determination process It is possible to recognize whether the determination result is a win or a loss. Then, when the first start opening winning designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-1-11.

(Step S104-1-11)
In step S104-1-11, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol storage designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the special symbol storage designation command to the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the special symbol memory specification command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Regarding out detection processing)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S104-6 of the input switch detection process) showing the out detection process performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S104-6-1)
In step S104-6-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not information indicating that the game ball has been detected has been input from the out detection SW 25a. When the information that the game ball has been detected is input from the out detection SW 25a, the process proceeds to step S104-6-2, and the information that the game ball has been detected is input from the out detection SW 25a. If not, the process proceeds to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S104-6-2)
In step S104-6-2, the main CPU 101 counts and stores the number of out balls in the limit management counter. When the number of out balls is counted and stored in the limit management counter, the process proceeds to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding special symbol related processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt process) showing the special symbol related processing performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S105-1)
In step S105-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 stores a flag indicating that the game is stopped. For example, when the main CPU 101 starts the variation of the special symbol, it sets a value “1” indicating that the special symbol status flag is being varied (step S105-2-13 in FIG. 21 described later), When stopping the variation of the symbols, the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-4-3 in FIG. 22 to be described later). After setting the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped, the value "2" indicating the winning game is set in the case of winning. Then, if the value "0" indicating that it is stopped is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2, and if the value "0" indicating that it is stopped is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-3. to migrate.

(Step S105-2)
In step S105-2, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. The processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 21 . Then, when the special symbol variation start time processing is completed, the processing is shifted to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-3)
In step S105-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 stores a flag indicating that the game is changing. Then, when the value "1" indicating that it is fluctuating is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4, and if the value "1" indicating that it is fluctuating is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-5. to migrate.

(Step S105-4)
In step S105-4, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol changing process shown in FIG. The processing will be detailed later with reference to FIG. 22 . Then, when the special symbol fluctuation process is completed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5)
In step S105-5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value "0" indicating that it is stopped is not set and that the value "1" that indicates that it is fluctuating is not set, the winning game is set, and the winning game process shown in FIG. 24 is performed. The processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 24 . Then, when the winning game process is completed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding special symbol fluctuation start processing)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-2 of special symbol related processing) showing the special symbol variation start time processing performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S105-2-1)
In step S105-2-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a hold in the hold storage area of the symbol variation game corresponding to the second start port 22 provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Then, if there is a hold corresponding to the second start port 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-2, and if there is no hold corresponding to the second start port 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-4. to migrate.

(Step S105-2-2)
In step S105-2-2, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of pending of the second starting port 22. FIG. As for the subtraction, it corresponds to emptying the storage area of "1" after sliding the determination information (random value) of the "relevant variable storage area" to the "fourth storage area". Along with this, the display of the second special symbol reservation display 27d also changes to a display mode (from "blinking" to "lighting" or from "lighting" to "lighting out") according to the number of reservations. Then, when "1" is subtracted from the number of suspensions of the second starting port 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-3.

(Step S105-2-3)
In step S105-2-3, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol storage designation command (second special symbol storage designation command) in the command transmission area in order to subtract the number of reservations managed by the effect control board 200. Then, when the special symbol storage specification command (second special symbol storage specification command) is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-4)
In step S105-2-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a hold in the hold storage area corresponding to the first start port 21 provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Then, if there is a hold corresponding to the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-5, and if there is no hold corresponding to the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-7. to migrate.

(Step S105-2-5)
In step S105-2-5, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of reservations of the first starting port 21. FIG. As for the subtraction, it corresponds to emptying the storage area of "1" after sliding the determination information (random value) of the "relevant variable storage area" to the "fourth storage area". Along with this, the display of the first special symbol reservation display 27c also changes to a display mode (from "blinking" to "lighting" or from "lighting" to "lighting out") according to the number of reservations. Then, when "1" is subtracted from the number of reservations of the first starting port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6.

(Step S105-2-6)
In step S105-2-6, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol storage designation command (first special symbol storage designation command) in the command transmission area in order to subtract the number of reservations managed by the effect control board 200. Then, when the special symbol storage specification command (first special symbol storage specification command) is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-7)
In step S105-2-7, the main CPU 101 displays "waiting for customer" on the image display device 26 when there is neither a hold corresponding to the second start port 22 nor a hold corresponding to the first start port 21. In order to display the screen, a customer waiting state designation command is set in the command transmission area. Then, when the customer waiting state designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

The "waiting for customers" screen includes, for example, the sub-symbols confirmed and displayed in the last completed symbol variation game, the background image displayed in the last completed symbol variation game, and the variation icon display area 26o. , 1st starting opening 1st reserved ball image display area 26g to 1st starting opening 4th reserved ball image display area 26j (including the reserved ball image display area of the 2nd starting opening) are displayed For example, it is a state in which an image (for example, a level gauge image or an image imitating a cross key button) is added and displayed to notify that the volume can be adjusted or the amount of light can be adjusted. be. Then, when a predetermined time elapses in "waiting for customer", "demonstration effect" is executed. In the "demonstration effect", the sub-symbols and background images displayed in "waiting for customers", the variable icon display area 26o, the first start opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start opening fourth The reserved ball image display area 26j (which may also include the reserved ball image display area of the second starting port) is not displayed, and for example, the entire display area is used to prompt the model name, manufacturer name, and prevention of addiction to the game. Display alert information (see FIG. 73). Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses in the "demonstration effect", it becomes "waiting for customers" again.

It should be noted that the customer waiting state designation command may not be transmitted. In this case, when the effect control board 200 measures the time from the end of the previous symbol variation game, and measures the predetermined time without receiving a new start time command (special symbol variation pattern designation command, etc.). , the "waiting for customer" screen may be displayed. This eliminates the need for a customer-waiting state designation command, thereby reducing the number of commands and simplifying the control.

(Step S105-2-8)
In step S105-2-8, after performing step S105-2-2, when the main CPU 101 reaches the relevant process, the determination information (random value) acquired and stored in the second start opening detection process is stored. On the other hand, after performing step S105-2-5, if the process is reached, the determination information (random value) acquired and stored in the first start opening detection process is used to number) is hit determination information (random value). Furthermore, the main CPU 101 determines a special symbol based on the determination result. For example, if it is determined that the determination information (random value) acquired and stored in the first start opening detection process is a hit, one of the special symbols A to C is determined, and when the first start opening is detected If it is determined that the determination information (random number value) acquired and stored in the process is wrong, the special symbol D is determined. Then, when the special symbol hit determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S105-2-9.

(Step S105-2-9)
In step S105-2-9, the main CPU 101 sets the effect symbol designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the effect symbol designation command to the effect control board 200. FIG. For example, when the special design D is determined based on the determination result of step S105-2-8, the production design designation command corresponding to the special design D is set. Then, when the production design designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-10.

(Step S105-2-10)
At step S105-2-10, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation game (using the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8). Then, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S105-2-11.

(Step S105-2-11)
At step S105-2-11, the main CPU 101 designates a special symbol variation pattern in the command transmission area in order to transmit a command indicating the special symbol variation pattern determined at step S105-2-10 to the effect control board 200. set command. For example, when "variation pattern 9" is determined in step S105-2-10, a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating "variation pattern 9" is set. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-12.

(Step S105-2-12)
At step S105-2-12, the main CPU 101 sets the time management counter of the main RAM 103 to a variation time (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined at step S105-2-10. For example, when "fluctuation pattern 9" is determined, the fluctuation time "15 s" is set. After setting the variable time, the process proceeds to step S105-2-13.

(Step S105-2-13)
At step S105-2-13, the main CPU 101 sets a value “1” indicating that the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 is fluctuating. Thereby, it can be recognized that the special symbol is changing. Also, in this process, subtraction of the variable time set in step S105-2-12 is started. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "1" indicating that it is fluctuating is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

In the description of FIG. 21 above, if there is the determination information of the second starting port 22 in step S105-2-1, the special symbol hitting determination process is executed with priority over the first starting port 21. The special symbol hit determination process may be executed in the order in which the ball is entered into the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22.例文帳に追加

(Regarding processing during special symbol fluctuation)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-4 of the special symbol related process) showing the special symbol changing process performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG.

(Step S105-4-1)
In step S105-4-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the set variable time has elapsed in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. FIG. For example, when "fluctuation pattern 9" is determined and "15 S" is set, it is determined whether "15 S" has passed. Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-4-2, and when the special symbol variation time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. to migrate.

(Step S105-4-2)
In step S105-4-2, the main CPU 101 sends to the effect control board 200 a special symbol confirmation command for stopping the sub-symbols that are being variably displayed on the image display device 26. Set the special pattern confirmation command. Then, when the special symbol determination command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-3.

(Step S105-4-3)
In step S105-4-3, the main CPU 101 sets a value "0" indicating that the game is stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. Thereby, it can be recognized that the special symbol is stopped. Then, when the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S105-4-4.

(Step S105-4-4)
At step S105-4-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of determination at step S105-2-8 in FIG. 21 is winning. If it is a win, the process proceeds to step S105-4-5, and if it is not a win, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11.

(Step S105-4-5)
At step S105-4-5, the main CPU 101 sets a value “2” indicating a winning game in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. Thereby, it can be recognized that it is a winning game. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "2" indicating the winning game is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-6.

(Step S105-4-6)
At step S105-4-6, the main CPU 101 clears the gaming state. For example, if the current game state is the normal game state, it is the normal game state as it is, and if the current game state is the time-saving game state (A, B), it is the normal game state, and the current game state is the variable game state. If there is, it will be in a normal game state. As a result, for example, even if you win in the time-saving game state (A, B), the general electric support becomes "none" during the winning game, and the game ball enters only the second start port 22 during the winning game. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss due to the game ball not entering the big winning hole 24.例文帳に追加Then, when the gaming state is cleared, the process proceeds to step S105-4-7.

(Step S105-4-7)
At step S105-4-7, the main CPU 101 clears each game number counter. That is, when a winning game is won, each game number counter is cleared (the counter value is set to 0) before starting the winning game. When each game number counter is cleared, the process proceeds to step S105-4-8.

(Step S105-4-8)
At step S105-4-8, the main CPU 101 shifts to a winning opening to notify that a winning game has started. For example, in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103, the state of the winning game is stored. Set to '2' if it is an interval between rounds and '3' if it is an ending. Then, when the game is shifted to the winning opening, the process shifts to step S105-4-9.

(Step S105-4-9)
In step S105-4-9, the main CPU 101 sets the hit opening command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the win opening command for executing the effect corresponding to the opening of the winning game to the effect control board 200. . Then, when the winning opening command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-10.

(Step S105-4-10)
At step S105-4-10, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the opening of the winning game (for example, “10 seconds”) in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. FIG. Then, when the time corresponding to the winning opening is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11)
At step S105-4-11, the main CPU 101 performs the processing by game state shown in FIG. The processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 23 . Then, when the game state-specific processing ends, the processing shifts to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding processing by game state)
FIG. 23 is a flow chart (subroutine of step S105-4-11 of the special symbol variation processing) showing the processing by game state performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S105-4-11-1)
In step S105-4-11-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is the time-saving game state A. Specifically, in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, it is determined whether or not "1" indicating the time saving game state A is stored. Then, if the current game state is the time-saving game state A, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-2, and if the current game state is not the time-saving game state A, step S105-4-11 The processing is shifted to -8.

(Step S105-4-11-2)
In step S105-4-11-2, the main CPU 101 updates (adds) the time saving game state B activation counter provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Specifically, the time saving game state B activation counter is "+1". Since the counter for activating the time saving game state B does not become "898" in the time saving game state A, when the processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-3, and the time saving game state game number counter is updated. (subtract).
The update can be performed in either the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 21 or the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 22 .

(Step S105-4-11-3)
In step S105-4-11-3, the main CPU 101 updates (subtracts) the time-saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Specifically, the time-saving game state game number counter is "-1". Then, when the time-saving game state game number counter is updated (subtracted), the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-4.

(Step S105-4-11-4)
At step S105-4-11-4, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. When the number-of-games counter command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-5.

(Step S105-4-11-5)
At step S105-4-11-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the counter value after the subtraction is 0 as a result of updating (subtracting) the number-of-games counter in the time-saving gaming state at step S105-4-11-3. . Then, if the counter value after subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-6, and if the counter value after subtraction is not 0, step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. to process.

(Step S105-4-11-6)
At step S105-4-11-6, the main CPU 101 changes the game state to the normal game state. Specifically, "0" is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate the normal game state. Then, when the game state is changed to the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-7.

(Step S105-4-11-7)
In step S105-4-11-7, the main CPU 101 sends the game state designation command (normal) to the production control board 200 to indicate that the game state is normal. Set in the command transmission area. Then, when the game state designation command (normal) indicating the normal game state is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-8)
At step S105-4-11-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is the normal game state. Specifically, it is determined whether “0” indicating the normal game state is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 . Then, when the current game state is the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-9, and when the current game state is not the normal game state, step S105-4-11-17. to process.

(Step S105-4-11-9)
In step S105-4-11-9, the main CPU 101 updates (adds) the counter for activating the time saving game state B provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Specifically, the time saving game state B activation counter is "+1". Then, when the time saving game state B activation counter is updated (added), the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-10.
The update can be performed in either the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 21 or the symbol variation game based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 22 .

(Step S105-4-11-10)
At step S105-4-11-10, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. When the number-of-games counter command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-11.

(Step S105-4-11-11)
At step S105-4-11-11, the main CPU 101 sets a game number display update command. Then, when the game number display update command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-12.

(Step S105-4-11-12)
In step S105-4-11-12, the main CPU 101 updates (adds) the counter for activating the time saving game state B in step S105-4-11-9, and determines whether the updated counter value is "898". judge. Then, if the updated counter value is "898", the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-13, and if the updated counter value is not "898", the main control board timer interrupt The process proceeds to step S106 of the process.

(Step S105-4-11-13)
At step S105-4-11-13, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the time-saving game state B. FIG. Specifically, in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, "3" is stored to indicate the time-saving game state. Then, when the game state is the time-saving game state B, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-14.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the game number counter for activating the time saving game state B reaches "898" in the normal game state, the normal game state is shifted to the time saving game state B. Since the number-of-games counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B is cleared in step S105-4-7 of FIG. 22, for example, in the time-saving gaming state A and the normal game state, the symbols fluctuate continuously without winning the winning game. When the game is played "898" times (a disadvantageous situation for the player), the game is shifted to the time-saving game state B as a remedy. As a result, "898" times becomes one standard, and the number of players who continue playing without limit can be reduced.

It should be noted that the transition to the time-saving gaming state B in the process may be referred to as "opportunity 2" or "time-saving gaming state operated (shifted) by opportunity 2".

Further, when setting values of a plurality of stages are provided, the value of the number-of-games counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B, which shifts to the time-saving gaming state B, may be common to all set values. For example, even when the set value is 1 or when the set value is 6, the value of the number-of-games counter for activating the time-saving game state B that shifts to the time-saving game state B may be "898". As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being blindly continued without knowing which set value is set, and it is possible to clarify the standard such as "898" times regardless of what set value is set. can.

On the other hand, when a plurality of stages of setting values are provided, the value of the number-of-games counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B, which shifts to the time-saving gaming state B, may be varied for each set value. For example, when the set value is 1, it may be set to "898", and when the set value is 6, it may be set to "750". As a result, the set value can be grasped from the number of games that shift to the time-saving game state B, so that attention is paid to the number of games to shift to the time-saving game state B, leading to an improvement in game interest.

(Step S105-4-11-14)
At step S105-4-11-14, the main CPU 101 sets "1212" in the time-saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. That is, in the time-saving gaming state A and the normal gaming state, if the symbol variation game is continuously performed "898" times without winning the winning game (disadvantageous situation for the player), the number of "1212" times is relieved. Time saving game state B is given. When "1212" is set in the time-saving game state game number counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-15.

(Step S105-4-11-15)
In step S105-4-11-15, the main CPU 101 transmits a game state designation command (time reduction B) indicating the time reduction game state B to the effect control board 200, in order to transmit the game state designation command (time reduction B) is set in the command transmission area. Then, when the game state designation command (time saving B) indicating that the time saving game state B is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-16.

(Step S105-4-11-16)
In step S105-4-11-16, the main CPU 101 clears the number-of-games counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B in the main RAM 103 (sets the counter value to 0). Then, when the number-of-games counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B is cleared (the counter value is set to 0), the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-17)
In step S105-4-11-17, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is the time-saving game state B. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "3" indicating the time-saving game state B is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 . And, if the current game state is the time-saving game state B, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-18, if the current game state is not the time-saving game state B, step S105-4-11 -23.

(Step S105-4-11-18)
In step S105-4-11-18, the main CPU 101 updates (subtracts) the time-saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Specifically, the time-saving game state game number counter is "-1". Then, when the time-saving game state game number counter is updated (subtracted), the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-19.

(Step S105-4-11-19)
At step S105-4-11-19, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. When the number-of-games counter command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-20.

(Step S105-4-11-20)
At step S105-4-11-20, the main CPU 101 determines whether the counter value after the subtraction is 0 as a result of updating (subtracting) the number-of-time-reduction game state counter at step S105-4-11-18. . Then, if the counter value after subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-21, and if the counter value after subtraction is not 0, step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. to process.

(Step S105-4-11-21)
At step S105-4-11-21, the main CPU 101 changes the game state to the normal game state. Specifically, "0" is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate the normal game state. Then, when the game state is changed to the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-22.

(Step S105-4-11-22)
In step S105-4-11-22, the main CPU 101 sends the game state designation command (normal) to the production control board 200 to indicate that the game state is normal. Set in the command transmission area. Then, when the game state designation command (normal) indicating the normal game state is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-23)
In step S105-4-11-23, the main CPU 101 updates (adds) the variable probability game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. FIG. Specifically, the probability variable gaming state game number counter is "+1". Then, when the probability variable gaming state game number counter is updated (added), the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-24.
As a result of updating (adding) the probability variable gaming state game number counter, when it becomes 10000, the same processing as steps S105-4-11-6 and S105-4-11-7 is performed, but is omitted in this flowchart .

(Step S105-4-11-24)
At step S105-4-11-24, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. When the number-of-games counter command is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding winning game processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S105-5 of special symbol-related processing) showing the winning game processing performed in the main control board 100. As shown in FIG.

(Step S105-5-1)
In step S105-5-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning opening is in progress. That is, it is determined whether or not "0" indicating a winning opening is set in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103 . When the big winning opening is opened in step S105-5-3 which will be described later, the value of the winning state storage area changes from "0" to "1". If it is during the winning opening, the process proceeds to step S105-5-2, and if it is not during the winning opening, the process proceeds to step S105-5-4.

(Step S105-5-2)
In step S105-5-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time corresponding to the winning opening (for example, "10S") has elapsed. Then, if the time corresponding to the winning opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-5-3, and if the time corresponding to the winning opening has not elapsed, step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing. to process.

(Step S105-5-3)
In step S105-5-3, the main CPU 101 opens the big winning opening 24 by driving the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 24b. Also, in the time management counter of the main RAM 103, the open time of 29.5 seconds is set. As a result, the first round of the winning game is started. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "0" to "1". Then, when the big winning opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-4)
At step S105-5-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big winning opening is open. It is determined whether or not "1" indicating that the big winning hole is open is set in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103. - 特許庁Then, when the big winning opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step S105-5-5, and when the big winning opening is not being opened, the process proceeds to step S105-5-7.

(Step S105-5-5)
In step S105-5-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether 29.5 seconds have passed while the big winning hole 24 remains open without 10 balls being detected by the big winning hole detection SW 24a, or the main CPU 101 detects the big winning hole. It is determined whether or not 10 balls have been detected by the SW 24a, or whether any condition for closing the big winning opening has been established. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S105-5-6, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. to migrate.

(Step S105-5-6)
In step S105-5-6, the main CPU 101 shifts to an inter-round interval that constitutes a period from when the big winning port 24 is closed to when it is next opened. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "1" to "2". When the inter-round interval is entered, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-7)
In step S105-5-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether the interval between rounds is in progress. That is, it is determined whether or not "2" indicating the inter-round interval is set in the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103 . If it is during the interval between rounds, the process proceeds to step S105-5-8, and if it is not during the interval between rounds, the process proceeds to step S105-5-13.

(Step S105-5-8)
In step S105-5-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is time to end the final round. For example, in step S105-5-11, which will be described later, as a result of updating (incrementing or decrementing) the number of rounds, if the number of remaining rounds is "0", it is determined that the last round has ended. If it is the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-5-9, and if it is not the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-5-11.

(Step S105-5-9)
In step S105-5-9, the main CPU 101 shifts to an ending informing that the winning game has ended. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "2" to "3". Also, the time corresponding to the ending of the winning game (for example, 10 seconds) is set in the time management counter of the main RAM 103 . Then, when the process is shifted to the ending, the process shifts to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-10)
In step S105-5-10, the main CPU 101 sets the ending command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the ending command for executing the effect corresponding to the ending of the winning game to the effect control board 200. Then, when the ending command is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-11)
At step S105-5-11, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round number counter of the main RAM 103. FIG. The update method may be increment or decrement. For example, when 5 rounds are awarded, the round number counter of the main RAM 103 may be set to "5" and decremented by 1 each time one round is completed. may be incremented by 1 each time one round is digested instead of setting "5" to . After updating the number of rounds, the process proceeds to step S105-5-12.

(Step S105-5-12)
At step S105-5-12, the main CPU 101 opens the big winning opening 24 by driving the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 24b. Also, in the time management counter of the main RAM 103, the open time of 29.5 seconds is set. As a result, the second and subsequent rounds of the winning game are started. In this process, the value of the winning state storage area is changed from "0" to "1". Then, when the big winning opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-13)
At step S105-5-13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to the ending set at step S105-5-9 has passed. Then, if the time corresponding to the ending has passed, the process proceeds to step S105-5-14, and if the time corresponding to the ending has not passed, step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process. to process.

(Step S105-5-14)
In step S105-5-14, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol is one of "special symbol A", "special symbol B" and "special symbol E". That is, it is determined whether the special symbol determined based on the hit is one of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E". Then, if the special symbol is one of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E", the process proceeds to step S105-5-15, and the special symbol is "special symbol A". , "special symbol B" and "special symbol E", the process proceeds to step S105-5-18.

(Step S105-5-15)
At step S105-5-15, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the variable probability gaming state. Therefore, in this process, "2" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. When "2" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-5-16.

(Step S105-5-16)
In step S105-5-16, the main CPU 101 transmits a gaming state designation command (variable probability) to the production control board 200 to transmit the gaming state designation command (variable probability) indicating that the variable probability gaming state is in effect. Set to area. Then, when the game state designation command indicating the variable probability game state is set, the process proceeds to step S105-5-17.

(Step S105-5-17)
At step S105-5-17, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to a value "0" indicating that the game is stopped. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-18)
In step S105-5-18, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the time-saving game state A. FIG. Therefore, in this process, "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. FIG. When "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-5-19.

It should be noted that the transition to the time-saving gaming state A in the process may be referred to as "opportunity 1" or "time-saving gaming state operated (shifted) by the opportunity 1" below.

(Step S105-5-19)
In step S105-5-19, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103 to "100". As a result, the time-saving game state A of "100" times starts from the next variation. When "100" is set in the time-saving game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-5-20.

It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of values set in the time-saving game state game number counter for both "opportunity 1" and "opportunity 2". Also, one of the "trigger 1" and "trigger 2" has a plurality of types, but the other may have only one type.

(Step S105-5-20)
In step S105-5-20, the main CPU 101 sets a command transmission area in order to transmit a game state designation command (time saving A) indicating the time saving game state A to the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the game state designation command (time saving A) indicating the time saving game state A is set, the process proceeds to step S105-5-21.

(Step S105-5-21)
At step S105-5-21, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to a value "0" indicating that the game is stopped. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding abnormality determination processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S108 of the main control board timer interrupt process) showing the abnormality determination process performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S108-1)
In step S108-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a magnetic sensor input has been made. Specifically, it is determined whether an input has been made from the magnetic sensor 27h. If an input is made from the magnetic sensor 27h, the process proceeds to step S108-2, and if no input is made from the magnetic sensor 27h, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-2)
In step S108-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h exceeds a specified value. If the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h exceeds the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-3, and if the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h does not exceed the specified value, , the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-3)
In step S108-3, the main CPU 101 sets the magnetic anomaly error designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the magnetic anomaly error designation command for notifying the magnetic anomaly to the effect control board 200. FIG. Then, when the magnetic anomaly error designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-4)
In step S108-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an electric wave sensor input has been made. Specifically, it is determined whether an input has been made from the radio wave sensor 27i. If an input is made from the radio wave sensor 27i, the process proceeds to step S108-5, and if no input is made from the radio wave sensor 27i, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S108-5)
In step S108-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i exceeds a specified value. If the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i exceeds the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-6. , the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S108-6)
In step S108-6, the main CPU 101 sets the radio wave abnormality error designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the radio wave abnormality error designation command for notifying the radio wave abnormality to the effect control board 200. Then, when the radio wave abnormality error designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Regarding limit management processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S113 of the main control board timer interrupt process) showing the limit management process performed in the main control board 100. FIG.

(Step S113-1)
In step S113-1, the main CPU 101 refers to the limit management counter of the main RAM 103 and obtains the value of safe balls currently counted and stored (the number of safe balls). When the value of safe balls (the number of safe balls) is obtained, the process proceeds to step S113-2.

(Step S113-2)
In step S113-2, the main CPU 101 refers to the limit management counter of the main RAM 103 and obtains the value of out balls currently counted and stored (the number of out balls). When the out-ball value (the number of out-balls) is obtained, the process proceeds to step S113-3.

(Step S113-3)
At step S113-3, the main CPU 101 performs a process of calculating the difference number. Specifically, the value of the safe balls (the number of safe balls) obtained in step S113-1 is subtracted by the value of the out balls (the number of out balls) obtained in step S113-2 to calculate the number of difference balls. After calculating the number of difference balls, the process proceeds to step S113-4.

(Step S113-4)
In step S113-4, the main CPU 101 updates the limit management counter with the calculated number of difference balls. As a result, the latest difference number of balls is managed (stored) by the limit management counter. When the limit management counter is updated with the calculated number of difference balls, the process proceeds to step S113-5. In this process, the calculated ball difference number managed by the limit management counter is overwritten with the calculated ball difference number, but old data (ball difference number data) may be stored for a certain period of time.

(Step S113-5)
In step S113-5, the main CPU 101 transmits a limit management counter (number of difference balls) command to make the effect control board 200 recognize the value of the limit management counter (especially the current number of difference balls). By receiving the command, the effect control board 200 can execute advance notification before the limit function is activated (see FIG. 76). When the limit management counter (number of difference balls) command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S113-6.

(Step S113-6)
At step S113-6, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of difference balls is "95000" or more as a result of updating the limit management counter at step S113-4. As a result, if the number of difference balls is not "95000" or more, the process proceeds to step S114 of the main control board timer interrupt processing, and if the number of difference balls is "95000" or more, the process proceeds to step S113-7. to migrate.

Note that "95000" is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate. For example, "50000" may be used. Moreover, the value may differ for each performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, as in the present embodiment, if the performance to shift (or continue) at 65% to the probability variation gaming state is set to "95000", for example, if it is the performance to shift (or continue) at 80% to the probability variation gaming state It may be "80000". Thereby, an appropriate value can be set according to the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG.

Moreover, if it is within "95000", the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may set the value arbitrarily. For example, the setting may be made in units of "5000". Thereby, even if it is the same pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to give characteristics to each game parlor.

(Step S113-7)
In step S113-7, the main CPU 101 transmits a limit function activation start command to the effect control board 200 in order to notify the effect control board 200 that the limit function is activated. By receiving the command, the effect control board 200 can execute notification that the limit function has been activated (see FIG. 68). After transmitting the command, the process proceeds to step S113-8.

(Step S113-8)
In step S113-8, the main CPU 101 transmits a firing stop command to the payout control board 300 to stop the operation of the firing device 305 (for example, turn off the firing solenoid). By receiving the command, the payout control board 300 disables the launching device 305 from shooting game balls even if the player touches the handle touch sensor. After transmitting the command, the process proceeds to step S113-9.

(Step S113-9)
At step S113-9, the main CPU 101 lights all the pattern display devices 27. FIG. Specifically, the first special symbol display device 27a, the second special symbol display device 27b, the first special symbol reservation display device 27c, the second special symbol reservation display device 27d, the normal design display device 27e, the normal design reservation display device 27f, illuminates all the LEDs and segments that make up the round indicator 27g. As a result, if the connector connecting the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 (the connector necessary for command transmission) is in a disconnected or half-inserted state, the limit function operation start command cannot be transmitted to the effect control board 200. Even if there was not (that is, even if the notification that the limit function was activated was not performed), the symbol display device 27 on the main control board 100 side is fully lit, so that some irregular event has occurred. It can be suggested to a player or an administrator. When all the pattern display devices 27 are turned on, the process proceeds to step S113-10.

Note that the configuration of step S113-9 can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be all blinking instead of all lighting. With this configuration, it is possible to change the lighting more than lighting, so that it is possible to make it easier to recognize that an irregular event has occurred.

Moreover, not all of the pattern display device 27 may be used, but only a part thereof may be used. For example, only the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b (seg) may be used. If only the seg is used, the seg may be illuminated in a lighting manner (eg, "E.") corresponding to activation of the limit function. With this configuration, it is possible to add a message rather than lighting the LED, and it is possible to make it easier to recognize that an irregular event has occurred.
In this manner, a predetermined display mode is configured by full lighting, full blinking, partial lighting, partial blinking, and the like.

(Step S113-10)
At step S113-10, the main CPU 101 performs limit function activation processing (game stop). When this process is performed, the game remains in the state where the process is finished (the game is not enabled) unless the process of step S7 in FIG. 12 is performed.

Thus, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with a "limit function". In other words, as the winning game occurs continuously, only the safe balls increase, and when the difference ball number becomes "95000" or more, the game ball is forcibly disabled and the game is stopped (game making it impossible for the player to play any more games).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being significantly improved, and to prevent the player who has acquired many game balls from becoming excessively absorbed in the game.

Scenes in which the "limit function" operates include during the winning game, when the winning game is finished, during the variable probability game state, during the time-saving game state (A, B), and during the normal game state. In addition, during the variable probability gaming state, during the time saving gaming state (A, B), and during the normal gaming state, during execution of the symbol variation game and during non-execution of the symbol variation game are included. However, since it is assumed that the number of safe balls will increase at once and the limit function will be activated, the majority of cases occur when the winning game is finished during the winning game.

Next, control processing performed by the sub CPU 201 of the effect control board 200 will be described.

(Regarding control processing performed by the sub CPU 201)
Control programs shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 33 are stored in the sub ROM 202, and the sub CPU 201 reads the control programs from the sub ROM 202 and performs control processing according to the read control programs. First, the effect control board main processing of FIG. 27 will be described.

(Step S200)
In step S200, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage (power outage state). As a result, when the power is interrupted (power outage state), the process of step S200 is repeatedly executed, and when the power is not interrupted (power outage state), the process proceeds to step S201. When the power is interrupted (power outage state), the process can be executed using a backup power supply (not shown).

(Step S201)
In step S201, the sub CPU 201 performs initial setting processing for initializing the values of internal registers and the like. After completing the initial setting process, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the sub CPU 201 sets CTC. That is, a CTC (counter timer circuit) that has a function to create a pulse output with a constant period and a function to measure time is set, and the effect control board timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed periodically every 4 ms. , set the time constant register of the CTC. After setting the CTC, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the sub CPU 201 prohibits the interruption of the effect control board timer interrupt process which is periodically executed by interrupting the effect control board main process. When the interrupt is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number for effect. Then, when the effect random number updating process ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the sub CPU 201 permits the interruption of the effect control board timer interrupt process which is periodically executed by interrupting the effect control board main process. Then, when the interrupt is permitted, the process moves to step S203 again, and thereafter steps S203 to S205 are looped.

(Regarding production control board timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the effect control board timer interrupt process performed in the effect control board 200. As shown in FIG. This process is a process that is executed by interrupting the above-described effect control board main process periodically (for example, every 4 ms).

(Step S300)
In step S300, the sub CPU 201 saves the contents of the register to the stack area. After saving the contents of the register to the stack area, the process proceeds to step S301.

(Step S301)
In step S<b>301 , the sub CPU 201 performs processing for updating the timer managed by the effect control board 200 . After updating the timer, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 201 performs input processing of the operation device shown in FIG. This processing will be described in detail later using FIG. 29 . Then, when the operation device input processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 201 performs main command reception processing shown in FIGS. The processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. Then, when the main command reception process ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 201 performs a difference ball number counter display control process. This processing will be described in detail later using FIG. 33 . Then, when the differential ball number counter display control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for transmitting a subcommand. A subcommand is a command that is set in the main command receiving process shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, which will be described later. In this process, the subcommand is sent to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. . Then, the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c that have received the subcommand control the effects of display, sound, light emission, and drive corresponding to the subcommand. After transmitting the subcommand, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 201 restores the contents saved in the stack area in step S300 to the register. Then, when the contents saved in the stack area are returned to the register, the effect control board timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Regarding operation device input processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process) showing the operation device input process performed in the effect control board 200. FIG.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the cross key detection SW (up or down) input has been performed. The cross-key detection SW 16a shown in FIG. 4 has switches corresponding to the up, down, left, and right sides of the cross-key button 16. For example, if the top of the cross-key button 16 is operated, It can be determined that the input of the cross key detection SW (up) has been performed. Then, when the cross key detection SW (up or down) input is performed, the process proceeds to step S302-2, and when the cross key detection SW (up or down) input is not performed, step S302- 5 is processed.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 201 determines whether an upward cross key detection SW input has been made. If an upward cross key detection SW input is made, the process proceeds to step S302-3, and if an upward cross key detection SW input is not made, the process proceeds to step S302-4. Transition.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 201 transmits the light amount value change (increase) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. to set. Thereby, the luminance of the light emitting device 9 can be increased. Then, when the light amount value change (increase) subcommand is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-4)
In step S302-4, the sub CPU 201 transmits the light amount value change (decrease) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. to set. Thereby, the luminance of the light emitting device 9 can be lowered. Then, when the light amount value change (decrease) subcommand is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-5)
In step S302-5, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the cross key detection SW (left or right) input has been performed. Then, when the cross key detection SW (left or right) input is performed, the process proceeds to step S302-6, and when the cross key detection SW (left or right) input is not performed, step S302- The processing is shifted to 9.

(Step S302-6)
In step S302-6, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a right direction cross key detection SW input has been performed. If the right direction cross key detection SW input is performed, the process proceeds to step S302-7, and if the right direction cross key detection SW input is not performed, the process proceeds to step S302-8. Transition.

(Step S302-7)
In step S302-7, the sub CPU 201 sets a volume value change (increase) subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the volume value change (increase) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b. As a result, the volume value of BGM (background music), sound effects, etc. output from the speaker 10 can be increased. Then, when the volume value change (increase) subcommand is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-8)
In step S302-8, the sub CPU 201 sets the volume value change (decrease) subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the volume value change (decrease) subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b. As a result, the volume value of BGM, sound effects, etc. output from the speaker 10 can be lowered. Then, when the volume value change (decrease) subcommand is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

Note that steps S302-1 to S302-8 show processing when the cross key button 16 is operated to adjust the volume and adjust the light intensity, but this is only an example. Instead, other processing may be performed by operating the cross key button 16 . For example, the operation of the cross key button 16 may be used to change the item in the menu. For example, when the effect button 14 is pressed while waiting for customers or during a demonstration, the menu is displayed on the image display device 26. etc. can be confirmed.

(Step S302-9)
In step S302-9, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other operating devices. For example, if there is an input from the production button detection SW 14a, a production button operation subcommand is sent to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c, and if there is an input from the production lever detection SW 15a, the production lever operation subcommand is sent. It is transmitted to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when the processing corresponding to the other operating devices is finished, the processing is shifted to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding main command reception processing)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S301 of the effect control board timer interrupt process) showing the main command receiving process 1/2 performed in the effect control board 200. As shown in FIG.

(Step S301-1)
In step S301-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a power-related information command has been received. The power-related information command includes the above-described power-on designation command and power restoration designation command. Then, when the power-related information command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-2, and when the power-related information command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-4.

(Step S301-2)
In step S301-2, the sub CPU 201 performs a power-related information command reception process. For example, when a power-on designation command is received, processing related to power-on is performed, and when a power-restoration designation command is received, power restoration processing is performed. In this process, an initial value is set in the difference ball number management counter provided in the sub-RAM 203 . Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-3.

(Step S301-3)
In step S301-3, the sub CPU 201 sets a power source related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the power source related subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-4)
In step S301-4, the sub CPU 201 determines whether an error-related information command has been received. The error-related information command includes the above-mentioned magnetic anomaly error designation command, radio wave anomaly error designation command, and the like. If the error-related information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-5, and if the error-related information command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-7.

(Step S301-5)
In step S301-5, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when receiving an error-related information command. For example, when a magnetic anomaly error designation command is received, a process for notifying a magnetic anomaly error is performed, and when a radio anomaly error designation command is received, a process for notifying a radio anomaly error is performed. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-6.

(Step S301-6)
In step S301-6, the sub CPU 201 sets an error-related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the error-related subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-7)
In step S301-7, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it has received a limit management counter clear command. When the limit management counter clear command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-8, and when the limit management counter clear command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-9.

(Step S301-8)
In step S301-8, the sub CPU 201 sets a limit management counter clear subcommand for notifying that the limit management counter has been cleared in the subcommand transmission area. As a result, the notification shown in FIG. 72(b2) is performed. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-9)
In step S301-9, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a limit function cancellation promotion command has been received. Then, when the limit function cancellation prompting command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-10, and when the limit function cancellation prompting command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-11.

(Step S301-10)
In step S301-10, the sub CPU 201 sets a limit function cancellation promotion subcommand for notifying that the main RAM 103 is initialized (cleared) in the subcommand transmission area. As a result, the notification shown in FIG. 72(a2) is performed. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-11)
At step S301-11, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a limit function activation start command has been received. When the limit function operation start command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-12, and when the limit function operation start command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-13.

(Step S301-12)
In step S301-12, the sub CPU 201 sets a limit function activation start subcommand for notifying that the limit function has been activated in the subcommand transmission area. As a result, the notification shown in FIGS. 68(a2) and (b2) is performed. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-13)
In step S301-13, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a limit management counter (number of difference balls) command has been received. Then, when the limit management counter (number of difference balls) command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-14, and when the limit management counter (number of difference balls) command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-15. to migrate.

(Step S301-14)
In step S301-14, the sub CPU 201 updates the balance number management counter provided in the sub RAM 203. FIG. In this way, by providing a counter for managing the number of difference balls in the sub RAM 203 and updating it when a limit management counter (number of difference balls) command is received, the effect control board 200 also grasps the number of difference balls. can do. By grasping the difference number of balls, prior notification (see FIG. 76) can be performed before the limit function is activated. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-15)
In step S301-15, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the start port related information command has been received. The starting opening related information command includes the above-described first starting opening winning designation command, second starting opening winning designation command, and special symbol storage designation command. Then, when the start port related information command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-16, and when the start port related information command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-19.

(Step S301-16)
In step S301-16, the sub CPU 201 performs icon change effect determination processing. Specifically, when receiving the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command, the sub CPU 201 refers to the information of the determination result of the winning determination process included in the command, The display mode of the variable icon and the pending icon (the color of the variable icon and the pending icon described in the "holding prefetch effect" to be described later) is determined. Then, when the process is finished, the process proceeds to step S301-17.

(Step S301-17)
In step S301-17, the sub CPU 201 performs a starting opening light emitting device change effect determination process. The light emission color of the starter light emitting device is linked to the color of the hold icon determined in step S301-16. If it is determined to do so, the starting port light emitting device 21a also emits blue light. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-18.

(Step S301-18)
In step S301-18, the sub CPU 201 sets the starting port related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the starting port related subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-19)
At step S301-19, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a gaming state related information command has been received. The game state related information command includes a game state designation command (normal), a game state designation command (time saving A, time saving B), and a game state designation command (variable probability). Then, when the game state related information command is received, the process shifts to step S301-20, and when the game state related information command is not received, the process shifts to step S301-22.

(Step S301-20)
At step S301-20, the sub CPU 201 performs a game state related information command reception process. For example, when the game state designation command (normal) is received, the processing related to the normal game state is performed, and when the game state designation command (time saving A, time saving B) is received, the processing related to each time saving game state is performed, and the game state designation command When (probability variation) is received, the processing related to the probability variation gaming state is performed. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-21.

(Step S301-21)
In step S301-21, the sub CPU 201 sets the game state related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the game state related subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S301 of the effect control board timer interrupt process) showing the main command receiving process 2/2 performed in the effect control board 200. As shown in FIG.

(Step S301-22)
In step S301-22, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received an effect symbol designation command. Then, when the performance design designation command is received, the processing is shifted to step S301-23, and when the performance design designation command is not received, the processing is shifted to step S301-25.

(Step S301-23)
At step S301-23, the sub CPU 201 performs a process when receiving a performance symbol designation command. For example, when a performance pattern specifying command designating a special pattern A is received, the combination of decorative patterns '777' is determined so that the pattern combination of '777' is definitely displayed as the decorative pattern. It should be noted that, when receiving the performance design designation command designating the special design A, the combination of the design of the decorative design "444" is determined so that the combination of the design of "444" is displayed as the decorative design. good too. In this case, after the winning game is completed, the game may be shifted to the time-saving game state A so that the actual game state is the probability variable game state while the appearance is the time-saving game state A. . With this configuration, even the time-saving game state A may be advantageous in terms of appearance, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-24.

(Step S301-24)
In step S301-24, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect symbol subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the effect symbol subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-25)
In step S301-25, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received a special symbol variation pattern designation command. When the special symbol variation pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-26, and when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-31.

(Step S301-26)
At step S301-26, the sub CPU 201 performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, a variation performance pattern corresponding to the specified special symbol variation pattern is determined from a variation performance pattern determination table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 202 . In the variation performance pattern determination table, one special symbol variation pattern is associated with one or more variation performance patterns. For example, if it is "normal fluctuation" (7S) of "variation pattern 2", one corresponding fluctuation effect pattern (7S) is prepared, and "super reach 1" (40S) of "variation pattern 4" If there is, a plurality of corresponding variable effect patterns (40S) are prepared. Then, when "variation pattern 4" is received, any one variation performance pattern is determined from a plurality of prepared variation performance patterns. Since a plurality of prepared variable performance patterns have different performance contents, a plurality of performances can be executed for one variation pattern. Then, after completing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-27.

(Step S301-27)
In step S301-27, the sub CPU 201 performs icon change effect update processing. The icon change effect update process is to update the color of the icon determined in step S301-16 based on a change scenario (not shown). For example, if the change scenario is blue→yellow, it is determined to change to yellow in the process. In other words, the icon may change color each time a game with one variation is played. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-28.

(Step S301-28)
In step S301-28, the sub CPU 201 performs a starting opening light emitting device change effect update process. This processing is performed in conjunction with the color updated in step S301-27. For example, if the color is updated to yellow in step S301-27, the starting port light emitting device 21a also changes from blue to yellow. do. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-29.

(Step S301-29)
In step S301-29, the sub CPU 201 performs a big-hit announcement effect determination process. Specifically, the big hit notice effect to be executed in the symbol variation game is determined from the big win notice effect determination table (see FIGS. 35 to 41) stored in the sub ROM 202 . Details of the advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 41. FIG. Then, when the process is finished, the process moves to step S301-30.

(Step S301-30)
In step S301-30, the sub CPU 201 sends a variation pattern subcommand (for example, information determined in steps S301-26 to S301-29) to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. , set a variation pattern-related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-31)
In step S301-31, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a special symbol confirmation command has been received. Then, when the special symbol determination command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-32, and when the special symbol determination command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-34.

(Step S301-32)
In step S301-32, the sub CPU 201 performs a process when receiving a special symbol determination command. Specifically, processing is performed to confirm and display the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, the right decorative design image 26c, and the fourth design image 26d. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-33.

(Step S301-33)
In step S301-33, the sub CPU 201 sets a special symbol determination subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the special symbol determination subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-34)
At step S301-34, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number-of-games counter command has been received. Then, when the number-of-games counter command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-35, and when the number-of-games counter command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-37.

(Step S301-35)
At step S301-35, the sub CPU 201 performs a game number counter command reception process. Specifically, referring to the value of the counter of the number-of-games counter command, if the value of the counter is "798", the processing for displaying the number-of-games counter image 26p is performed, and the number-of-games counter image 26p is already displayed. If so, a process for updating display (subtraction display) of the number-of-games counter image 26p is performed. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-36.

(Step S301-36)
In step S301-36, the sub CPU 201 sets the game number counter related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the game number counter related subcommand to the image/sound control section 200b and the light emission drive control section 200c. . After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-37)
At step S301-37, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received a game number display update command. Then, if the game number display update command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-38, and if the game number display update command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-40.

(Step S301-38)
In step S301-38, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when receiving a game number display update command. Specifically, in the display layer in which the number-of-games image 26q is developed, a process for updating (adding and displaying) the number-of-games image 26q is performed. Then, after finishing the processing, the processing moves to step S301-39.

(Step S301-39)
In step S301-39, the sub CPU 201 stores the game count display update related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the game count display update related subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. set command. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-40)
In step S301-40, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a round specifying command has been received. Then, when the round designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S301-41, and when the round designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step S301-42.

(Step S301-41)
In step S301-41, the sub CPU 201 performs a holding continuous effect determination process. This processing will be described in detail later using FIG. 32 . Then, when the holding continuous effect determination process is finished, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-42)
In step S301-42, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other received commands. For example, when a setting value changing command, a setting value checking command, and a setting value checking end command are received, processing corresponding to these received commands is performed. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding the process of determining the pending continuous effect)
FIG. 32 is a flow chart (subroutine of step S301-41 of main command receiving process 2/2) showing a holding consecutive effect determination process performed in the effect control board 200. FIG.

(Step S301-41-1)
In step S301-41-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether pending storage has been performed. Specifically, the reserved storage area provided in the sub-RAM 203 is referenced to determine whether reserved storage has been performed. Then, when the pending storage is performed, the process proceeds to step S301-41-2, and when the suspended storage is not performed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-41-2)
In step S301-41-2, the sub CPU 201 refers to the difference ball number management counter of the sub RAM 203 and obtains the difference ball number. When the difference number of balls is obtained, the process proceeds to step S301-41-3.

(Step S301-41-3)
At step S301-41-3, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of difference balls (current number of difference balls) obtained at step S301-41-2 is "94000" or more. And, when it is "94000" or more, the process moves to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process, and when it is not "94000" or more, the process moves to step S301-41-4.

(Step S301-41-4)
In step S301-41-4, the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is winning information in the current pending memory. Specifically, by referring to the results of the hit determination included in the received first start win-win designation command and second start win-win designation command, it is determined whether there is hit information in the current pending memory. If there is winning information in the current pending memory, the process moves to step S301-41-5, and if there is no winning information in the current pending memory, the process moves to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process. do.

(Step S301-41-5)
In step S301-41-5, the sub CPU 201 determines a holding continuous effect. In other words, during the winning game in which the round designation command is received, execution of the holding continuous effect for notifying that the winning game will be executed continuously after the end of the winning game is determined. When the holding continuous effect is determined, the process proceeds to step S301-41-6.

(Step S301-41-6)
In step S301-41-6, the sub CPU 201 sets the holding continuous effect subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the holding continuous effect subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. . The holding consecutive effect will be explained again with reference to FIG. After finishing the process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding display control processing for difference number counter)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S304 of the effect control board timer interrupt process) showing the difference ball number counter display control process performed in the effect control board 200. As shown in FIG.

(Step S304-1)
In step S304-1, the sub CPU 201 refers to the difference ball number management counter of the sub RAM 203 and obtains the difference ball number. When the difference number of balls is obtained, the process proceeds to step S304-2.

(Step S304-2)
In step S304-2, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the difference ball number counter image display completion flag is ON. If the differential ball number counter image displayed flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S304-3, and if the differential ball number counter image displayed flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S304-4.

The differential ball number counter image display completion flag is a flag that is set when the differential ball number counter image is displayed, and is a flag that turns off when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off.

The difference ball number counter image is the counter image displayed when the current difference ball number is determined to be "90000" or more, as shown in step S304-4 (the difference ball number counter image rm in FIG. 76). It is an image that informs how much difference number of balls is left until the limit function is activated. Then, if the difference ball number counter image display completion flag is turned on, the display is continued even if the current difference ball number becomes "90000" or less. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed by repeated display and non-display of the difference number counter image.

Also, for example, if the current number of difference balls is "89999" and it is hidden, and the player changes at that timing, the limit function will soon be activated for the player who newly starts the game. You will start playing the game without knowing it. In such a case, even if a new player wins the winning game, the limit function is immediately activated and the player is forced to quit the game. On the other hand, if the difference ball number counter image display completion flag is on, a new game will be played if it is configured to continue to be displayed even if the current difference ball number becomes "90000" or less. The player who is about to start the game can determine whether or not to play by checking the difference number counter image, so the above problem can be solved.

(Step S304-3)
In step S304-3, the sub CPU 201 sets the difference ball number counter image update display data. Thereby, the current difference ball number can be displayed. After completing the processing, the processing is shifted to step S305 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S304-4)
In step S304-4, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current difference ball number is "90000" or more. If the current difference ball number is "90000" or more, the process proceeds to step S304-5, and if the current difference ball number is not "90000" or more, the process proceeds to step S305 of the effect control board timer interrupt process. Migrate processing.

(Step S304-5)
In step S304-5, the sub CPU 201 sets the difference ball number counter image display data. As a result, the display of the current number of difference balls can be started. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S304-6.

(Step S304-6)
In step S304-6, the sub CPU 201 turns on the difference ball number counter displayed flag in the sub RAM 203. FIG. After completing the processing, the processing is shifted to step S305 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing.

Next, examples of various effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described below.

(Look-ahead effect)
The look-ahead effect means that prior to the special symbol hit determination process in the special symbol variation start process at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22 (for example, advance determination processing (for example, in FIG. 18 Winning time determination processing) is performed, and it is an effect that is executed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination processing. If the look-ahead effect is not installed, for example, when the game ball enters the first start port 21, after acquiring and storing the determination information (random number value), special symbol hit determination is performed in the special symbol variation start processing. Since the process is performed, even if the judgment information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area", it will not be judged whether it is a hit or not until the judgment information (random value) is moved to the "variable storage area" not. Therefore, even if you have obtained the judgment information (random value) of "hit", you will have a sense of anticipation of winning at the stage before the judgment information (random value) is transferred to the "variable storage area". It is not possible to execute a performance that enhances the performance. However, if a look-ahead effect is installed, for example, "pre-determination processing (determination processing at the time of winning a prize)" is performed, and after determining "hit" or "losing", determination information (random value ) is transferred (including the variation transferred to the relevant variation storage area), continuous production can be executed, so the determination information (random value) is transferred to the "variation storage area". You will be able to raise the expectation of "hit" from the previous stage.

A specific example of the look-ahead effect is a "suspended look-ahead effect". "Reservation look-ahead effect" mainly refers to the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 26o, the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. It is an effect using the reserved icon to be displayed and the reserved icon displayed in the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26n. For example, when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", when the game ball enters the first start port 21, the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area" numerical value) is stored, pre-determination processing is performed. Then, based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process, if it is determined to perform the pending look-ahead effect, the default normal color (white) pending icon ( Display a prefetch pending icon that is different from the normal icon). As the prefetch pending icon, for example, it is possible to display multiple types and stages such as “blue”, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”, and the determination result of the preliminary determination process is “hit”. In the case of , one of "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "rainbow" can be displayed. Either "yellow", "green" or "red" can be displayed. Then, "Rainbow" can be selected only in the case of "winning", and in the case of "winning", it is easy to select "red", and in the case of "losing", select "blue". By making it easier, the expectations for the “red” hit are increased. Note that the relationship of the degree of expectation for a win is rainbow>red>green>yellow>blue>normal in descending order of the degree of expectation for a win. In the following, such an effect may be referred to as "holding change effect".

Further, as a specific example of another effect of the look-ahead effect, there is a "flash effect at the time of winning". "Flash effect at the time of winning" means that when a game ball enters the starting hole, the speaker lamp 10a provided in the lower speaker 10 emits light, and the symbol variation game related to the entering ball starts, or By continuing to emit light until the execution of the symbol variation game related to the entering ball or until the end of the symbol variation game related to the entering ball, it is an effect that raises the expectation for winning. For example, when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", when the game ball enters the first start port 21, the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area" numerical value) is stored, pre-determination processing is performed. Then, if it is determined that the flash effect at the time of winning is performed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process, a scenario for emitting light from the speaker lamp 10a (scenario in which the emission color is determined) is selected, and the selected scenario is selected. , the speaker lamp 10a is caused to emit light.
The color of light emitted from the speaker lamp 10a is, for example, red>green>blue in descending order of the degree of expectation for winning. It is also possible to change to a higher color. Also, it is possible to output a winning sound corresponding to each color.

Further, as a specific example of another effect of the look-ahead effect, there is a "zone effect". A “zone effect” is a effect mainly using the image display device 26 . For example, when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", when the game ball enters the first start port 21, the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area" numerical value) is stored, pre-determination processing is performed. Then, when it is determined that the zone effect is to be performed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process, for example, in the next symbol variation game, the image display device 26 displays "When all the special symbols are aligned, enter the ○○ zone!" And so on, after performing a production to incite the rush, align the special symbols and rush into the "○○ zone", and the determination information (random value) stored in the above-mentioned "fourth storage area" ” until the change is moved to “○○ zone” effect. During execution of this "XX zone" effect, the image display device 26 displays a telop such as "In the XX zone". The "zone effect" is more likely to be executed when it is determined to be "win" in the preliminary determination process, and is less likely to be executed when it is determined to be "losing". A great expectation can be given to the game being given.

Further, as a specific example of another effect of the look-ahead effect, there is a "chance continuous notice". The “chance eye continuous notice” is an effect using the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c mainly displayed on the image display device 26. FIG. For example, when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", when the game ball enters the first start port 21, the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area" numerical value) is stored, pre-determination processing is performed. Then, when it is determined that the chance consecutive effect is performed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination process, for example, the symbol variation game corresponding to the determination information (random value) stored in the "first storage area" is executed. Confirmation display, symbol variation game confirmation display corresponding to the determination information (random value) stored in the "second storage area", and determination information (random value) stored in the "third storage area" The combination of the decorative pattern images of the same color is stopped in the confirmation display of the pattern variation game and the. For example, in the decorative pattern image, '333' and '777' are red, '111' and '555' are green, and '222' and '444' are red. , "666" and "888" are composed of blue, combinations of only red such as "337" and "773", combinations of only green such as "115" and "551", and combinations of "246" and "246". ” and “628”, which are blue only combinations, are displayed over multiple variations, creating an effect that makes people expect that a win will be awarded in the subsequent symbol variation game. In addition, in the case of winning, it is easy to select a combination with only red, and in the case of losing, it is easy to select a combination with only blue. is increasing.

(Pseudo consecutive notice)
The pseudo-continuous advance notice mainly uses the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c displayed on the image display device 26, and the pseudo-continuous dedicated symbols (for example, the "pseudo" image gz). In the "game of one variation", the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols is repeatedly performed to make it appear as if the variation is being performed multiple times. For example, as shown in FIG. 8, a pseudo-run can be executed two or three times, and the more the number of times, the higher the expectation of winning. As a specific effect content, for example, "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative design image 26a, "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative design image 26c, and "Pseudo" is displayed as the middle decorative design image 26b. "Pseudo" image gz)" is temporarily stopped, and all the decorative pattern images are again variably displayed (at this point, pseudo consecutive two times), again as the left decorative pattern image 26a. Temporarily stop displaying "5", temporarily stop displaying "6" as the right decorative design image 26c, and temporarily stop displaying "pseudo consecutive dedicated design (for example, "pseudo" image gz)" as the middle decorative design image 26b. display, and again display all the decorative design images variably (at this point, three times in a pseudo-continuation). When "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c. is temporarily stopped and "6" is temporarily stopped as the right decorative symbol image 26c, the pseudo-continuation is three times. In addition, once the ready-to-win state has occurred, a so-called "post-reach pseudo-run" in which a "pseudo-run dedicated symbol (for example, a "pseudo" image gz)" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol image 26b. At the start of the fluctuation after the temporary stop display of , giving a notice (symbol stop notice) that a “pseudo-continuous dedicated pattern (for example, “pseudo” image gz)” will be temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative pattern image 26b, At that point, it is also possible to execute an effect such that three or more pseudo-runs are confirmed.

(Regarding the relationship between the winning sound for each icon, the changing sound, and the starting light emitting device (color))
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning sound, the changing sound, and the starter light emitting device (color) for each icon. In the figure, the determination time corresponds to the above-described "icon change effect determination processing", and the update time corresponds to the above-described "icon change effect update process". The winning sound and the changing sound are common when the ball enters the first start hole 21 and when the ball enters the second start hole 22. - 特許庁

When the default "normal icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Piron♪" as the prize winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Note that in the change scenario, for example, the blue icon will not change to the normal icon, so the column at the time of update is "-".
Further, when the "normal icon" is displayed, the light emission color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is white.

When the "blue icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "Poron♪" as a prize-winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
When the icon changes from the normal icon to the blue icon, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "Poron♪" as a change sound at the time of updating.
Further, when displaying the "blue icon", the emission color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is blue.

When the "yellow icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "Keep♪" as a prize-winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Also, when the normal icon changes to a yellow icon or when the blue icon changes to a yellow icon, a sound "Keep♪" is output from the speaker 10 as a change sound at the time of updating.
Moreover, when displaying a "yellow icon", the luminescent color of the starting port light-emitting device 21a is yellow.

When the "green icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "bang♪" as a prize-winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Also, when the normal icon changes to a green icon, when the blue icon changes to a green icon, or when the yellow icon changes to a green icon, a sound of "Chang♪" is played on the speaker as the change sound at the time of updating. Output from 10.
Further, when displaying the "green icon", the light emission color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is green.

When the "red icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Jackin'" as the prize winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Also, if the normal icon changes to a red icon, if a blue icon changes to a red icon, if a yellow icon changes to a red icon, or if a green icon changes to a red icon, the changes at the time of update As a sound, the sound "Jackin♪" is output from the speaker 10. - 特許庁
Moreover, when displaying a "red icon", the luminescent color of the starting port light-emitting device 21a is red.

When the "rainbow icon" is displayed, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "Quinn♪" as a prize winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
Also, when the normal icon changes to the rainbow icon, when the blue icon changes to the rainbow icon, when the yellow icon changes to the rainbow icon, when the green icon changes to the rainbow icon, When the icon changes from a red icon to a rainbow icon, the speaker 10 outputs a sound "Quinn♪" as a changing sound at the time of updating.
Further, when the "rainbow icon" is displayed, the light emission color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is rainbow.

The light emission of the start light emitting device 21a may be extinguished, for example, when the symbol variation game ends (confirmation display). Further, the erasing of the variable icon and the turning off of the starting port light emitting device 21a may be at different timings (for example, erasing is earlier than turning off, or erasing is earlier than turning off), or may be at the same timing.

Next, the big hit announcement effect will be described. The big-hit announcement effect (effect suggesting the possibility that a winning game will be executed) is the effect determined in step S301-29 of FIG.

FIG. 35 is a notice determination table 1, which is a table for determining a notice (pre-reach notice) to be executed before a reach is formed after the start of variation in the symbol variation game.
The table is stored in the sub ROM 202, and determines the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process, the variation effect pattern, the distribution, and the notice (contents). , and, while referring to the determined variable effect pattern, the notice (content) is determined using the extracted random number value for deciding the notice.

If the judgment result is a loss, if the variable performance pattern is a shortened variation, no notice is always decided, and if the variable performance pattern is a normal fluctuation, no notice is decided at 80%, and a dialogue notice is given at 20%. If it is determined and the variable effect pattern is normal reach, no notice is decided at 70%, and dialogue notice is decided at 30%.
Also, if the variable production pattern is super reach 1, no notice is determined at 20%, dialogue notice is decided at 70%, button vibration notice is decided at 10%, and the fluctuation production pattern is super reach 2. For example, 80% determines the advance notice of dialogue, and 20% determines the advance notice of button vibration.

If the judgment result is a hit, if the variable production pattern is normal reach, no notice is decided at 30%, dialogue notice is decided at 70%, and if the variable production pattern is super reach 1, notice is given at 20%. None is decided, 60% decides dialogue notice, and 20% decides button vibration notice.
In addition, if the variable production pattern is super reach 2, the dialogue notice is decided at 70%, the button vibration notice is decided at 30%, and if the fluctuation production pattern is full rotation reach, the speech notice is decided at 60%. , and the button vibration notice is determined at 40%.

The advance notice determination table 1 has the following features.
Dialog announcements can be performed even when reach is not performed. As a result, the feeling of boredom can be eliminated, and the loss of interest in the game can be prevented.
Even if super reach (loss, hit) is executed, no notice may be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent disappointment due to the pre-reach notice not being executed.
Button vibration advance notice can be executed at super reach or higher (super reach 1, 2, full rotation). As a result, it can be grasped in advance that super reach or higher (super reach 1, 2, full rotation) will be executed by the occurrence of button vibration advance notice, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, in the case of super reach 1, in the case of losing, it is easier to execute the advance notice of the dialogue than in the case of winning, and it is difficult to execute the advance notice of button vibration.
For example, in Super Reach 2, in the case of losing, it is easier to execute the advance notice of the dialogue than in the case of winning, and it is difficult to execute the advance notice of button vibration.
As a result, when the button vibration notice is executed, the degree of expectation of the player for the winning game can be increased, and the game can be played while the player wants the button vibration notice to be executed.

FIG. 36 is a dialog announcement determination table for determining the details of the dialog announcement. The basic determination method is the same as in FIG.

If the judgment result is a loss, if the variation production pattern is normal variation, the dialogue (white) is always determined, and if the variation production pattern is normal reach, the dialogue (white) is determined at 90%, and at 10%. If the dialogue (red) is determined and the variable production pattern is super reach 1, the dialogue (white) is determined at 20%, the dialogue (red) is determined at 50%, and the dialogue (red) is 2 levels at 30%. is determined.
If the variable performance pattern is super reach 2, the dialogue (white) is determined at 20%, the dialogue (red) is determined at 40%, and the dialogue (red) two stages is determined at 40%.

If the determination result is hit, if the variable production pattern is normal reach, the dialogue (white) is determined at 50%, the dialogue (red) is determined at 50%, and if the variable production pattern is super reach 1, 10% decides serif (white), 40% decides serif (red), and 50% decides serif (red) two levels.
If the variable production pattern is super reach 2, the dialogue (white) is determined at 10%, the dialogue (red) is determined at 30%, the dialogue (red) 2 stages is determined at 60%, and the variable production pattern is If it is a full rotation reach, 40% determines two stages of serif (red), and 60% determines serif (rainbow).

The dialog advance notice determination table has the following features.
For example, in the case of normal reach, in the case of losing, the line (white) is more likely to be executed and the line (red) is less likely to be executed than in the case of winning.
For example, in Super Reach 1, in the case of losing, dialogue (white) and dialogue (red) are more likely to be executed than in the case of winning, and dialogue (red) two stages are less likely to be executed.
For example, in Super Reach 2, in the case of losing, dialogue (white) and dialogue (red) are more likely to be executed than in the case of winning, and dialogue (red) two stages are less likely to be executed.
As a result, the player can play the game while wishing that the dialogue (red) and further the dialogue (red) two stages will be executed.

Serif (white) can be executed even at super reach or higher (excluding full rotation reach). As a result, it is possible to prevent disappointment due to the dialogue (white) appearing.
Serif (red) is viable in reach and above (normal reach, super reach 1, 2). As a result, it is possible to know in advance that reach or higher (normal reach, super reach 1, 2) will be executed due to the occurrence of lines (red), so that the amusement of the game can be improved.
Serif (red) 2 stages are executable at super reach and above (super reach 1, 2, full rotation). As a result, it can be grasped in advance that super reach or higher (super reach 1, 2, full rotation) will be executed by generating lines (red) in two stages, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.
Serif (rainbow) is only viable in full rotation reach. As a result, it is possible to associate the lines (rainbow) with the full-rotation reach, and it is possible to recognize in advance that the full-rotation reach will be performed.

FIG. 37 is a button vibration notice determination table for determining the details of the button vibration notice. The basic determination method is the same as in FIG.

If the determination result is a loss, if the variable effect pattern is super reach 1, 2 second vibration x 1 time is determined at 90%, 2 second vibration x 3 times is determined at 10%, and the variable effect pattern is super For reach 2, 80% determines 2 second vibration x 1 time, and 20% determines 2 second vibration x 3 times.

If the determination result is hit, if the variable performance pattern is super reach 1, 2 second vibration x 1 time is determined at 70%, 2 second vibration x 3 times is determined at 30%, and the variable performance pattern is super If reach 2, 2 second vibration × 1 time is determined at 60%, 2 second vibration × 3 times is determined at 40%, and if the fluctuation production pattern is a full rotation reach, 30% 2 second vibration × 1 time is determined and 70% 2 second vibration x 3 times.

The button vibration advance notice determination table has the following features.
For example, in Super Reach 1, in the case of losing, 2-second vibration x 1 time is more likely to be determined than in the case of winning, and 2-second vibration x 3 times is less likely to be determined.
For example, in Super Reach 2, in the case of losing, compared with the case of winning, it is easier to determine 2-second vibration x 1 time, and 2-second vibration x 3 times is less likely to be determined.
As a result, the game can be played while the player desires that the 2-second vibration is performed 3 times.

In the total rotation reach, the rate of determining 2-second vibration x 3 times is higher than the rate of determining 2-second vibration x 1 time. As a result, when the 2-second vibration is performed 3 times, the player's expectation level can be raised at once, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Note that the dialogue notice is a notice executed by the image display device 26, and the button vibration notice is a notice executed by the effect button 14, so both may be executed in a combined form at the same time. As a result, the degree of expectation of the player can be raised at once, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, the mode of the advance notice of dialogue and the advance notice of button vibration will be described.
FIG. 42 shows an aspect of a dialog announcement.
(a1) shows a mode of words (white), and during the variable display of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d, the character emits a word image SE1 saying "Is it reach?" ing. The serif (white) means that the background color in the balloon of the serif image SE1 is white, and the character portion is black, for example. In addition, the sound effect 1 is output together with the display of the dialogue image SE1, which also audibly suggests that the dialogue (white) has been displayed.

Then, when the dialogue image SE1 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds), the dialogue image SE1 is hidden as shown in (a2), and then a reach is formed as shown in (a3). Sometimes.

(b1) shows a mode of lines (red), and a line image SE2 saying "Chance!" . The serif (red) means that the background color in the balloon of the serif image SE2 is red, and the character portion is black, for example. In addition, the sound effect 2 is output along with the display of the dialogue image SE2, which also audibly suggests that the dialogue (red) has been displayed.

In the case of dialogue (red), the dialogue image SE2 disappears after a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed. The speech image SE2 that started to be displayed from b1) is kept displayed even after a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has passed, and another character speaks a speech image SE3 saying "Hot!". In the serif image SE3, the background color in the balloon is also red, and the character portion is black, for example. In addition, the sound effect 2 is output together with the display of the dialogue image SE3, which also audibly suggests that the dialogue (red) has been displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display of the dialogue image SE3, the dialogue images SE2 and SE3 are hidden, and then a reach is formed as indicated by (b3). That is, the execution period is 2.5 seconds for dialogue (red), and the execution period is 5.5 seconds for two stages of dialogue (red).

In this way, the dialog (white) and the dialog (red) are visually displayed in distinctly different manners, and the dialog (red) and the dialogue (red) in two stages are visually displayed in a clearly different manner. Therefore, it is possible to prevent difficulty in grasping which speech announcement has been executed.

In addition, sound effect 1 is output along with the display of dialogue (white), and sound effect 2 is output along with the display of dialogue (red). Difficult things can be prevented.
In addition, since sound effect 1 corresponds to dialogue (white) and sound effect 2 corresponds to dialogue (red), the sound effect output together with the dialogue announcement suggests the degree of expectation for the winning game. It can be said that

In the case of serifs (white), the background color is white and the characters are black, but the background color may be black and the characters may be white.
In other words, using a normal color means using "white" for either the background color or the characters.
In the case of serifs (red), the background color is red and the characters are black, but the background color may be black and the characters may be red.
In other words, using a specific color means using "red" for either the background color or the characters.
In addition, the text of the dialogue may be abstract content (for example, it may be reach!) or concrete content (for example, it is reach!).
Also, before (a1) and (b1), the effective period of the effect button 14 may be set and the operation promotion effect may be executed. As a result, the player can feel as if he or she is participating in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.
Also, before (a1) and (b1), when the effective period of the effect button 14 is set and the operation promotion effect is executed, if the effective period has passed without the effect button 14 being operated, the dialog announcement is given. You can choose not to run it. As a result, since the speech announcement is not executed unless the production button 14 is operated, the production button 14 can be positively operated.
Also, the audio corresponding to the lines may be output on a channel different from the channel on which the BGM is output. This makes it easier to grasp what kind of dialogue announcement has been executed. On the other hand, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may not be output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the background music from becoming difficult to hear.

FIG. 43 shows an aspect of button vibration advance notice.
(a1) is a scene in which the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d start to be displayed in a variable manner, and the production button 14 is not vibrating.
(a2) is a scene after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed since (a1), and in this scene, the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds.
(b1) is the same scene as (a1), and (b2) is a scene after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from (b1). At an interval of 0.5 seconds, the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds, and at an interval of 0.5 seconds, the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds.
That is, (a1) and (a2) are modes of vibration for 2 seconds x 1 time, and (b1) and (b2) are modes of vibration for 2 seconds x 3 times.
In this way, since the vibrations are made in distinctly different modes, it is possible to prevent difficulty in grasping which button vibration notice has been executed.

Note that the advance notice of button vibration is different in the number of vibrations, such as 2-second vibration x 1 time, 2-second vibration x 3 times, but may be different in vibration time. For example, there may be 2-second vibration and 5-second vibration, and 5-second vibration is less likely to be selected when losing than 2-second vibration and more likely to be selected when winning.

FIG. 38 shows a notice determination table 2, which is a table for determining a notice (in-reach notice) to be executed when a reach is formed in the symbol variation game. When the ready-to-win state is formed, it is intended to be the time when the left decorative pattern image 26a and the right decorative pattern image 26c are temporarily stopped (for example, 4↓4) until a predetermined time elapses (for example, 5 seconds). .
The table is stored in the sub ROM 202, and determines the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process, the variation effect pattern, the distribution, and the notice (contents). , and, while referring to the determined variable effect pattern, the notice (content) is determined using the extracted random number value for deciding the notice.

If the judgment result is a loss, if the variable production pattern is a shortened fluctuation, no notice is always decided, if the fluctuation production pattern is normal fluctuation, no notice is always decided, and if the fluctuation production pattern is normal reach , always without notice.
Also, if the variation production pattern is super reach 1, no notice is determined at 30%, logo notice is decided at 60%, car group notice is decided at 10%, and the change production pattern is super reach 2. For example, 35% of the time, no notice is decided, 60% decides on the logo notice, and 5% decides on the car group notice.

If the judgment result is a hit, if the variable effect pattern is normal reach, no notice is always decided, and if the variable effect pattern is super reach 1, no notice is decided at 10%, and the logo notice is decided at 40%. 60% determines the advance notice of the car group.
Also, if the variable production pattern is super reach 2, no notice is determined at 10%, logo notice is decided at 55%, car group notice is decided at 35%, and the variable production pattern is full rotation reach. For example, 40% determines the logo announcement, and 60% determines the car group announcement.

The advance notice determination table 2 has the following features.
Both the logo announcement and the car group announcement can be executed at super reach or higher (super reach 1, 2, full rotation), and are not executed at normal reach. As a result, the game can be played while the player wishes that the logo announcement or the car group announcement will be executed when the reach is formed.
For example, in Super Reach 1, in the case of losing, it is easier to execute no notice and logo notice than in the case of winning, and it is difficult to execute car group notice.
For example, in Super Reach 2, in the case of losing, it is easier to execute no advance notice and logo advance notice than in the case of winning, and it is difficult to execute the car group advance notice.
Thus, when the car group announcement is executed, the degree of expectation of the player for the winning game can be increased, and the game can be played while the player wants the car group announcement to be executed.

FIG. 39(a) is a logo announcement determination table for determining the details of the logo announcement, and FIG. 39(b) is a car group announcement determination table for determining the details of the car group announcement. The basic determination method is the same as in FIG.

In the logo notice determination table, if the determination result is a failure, if the variable performance pattern is super reach 1, chance is determined at 90%, intense heat is determined at 10%, and the variable performance pattern is super reach 2. If so, chance is determined 85% of the time, and heat is determined 15% of the time.

If the judgment result is hit, if the variable production pattern is super reach 1, chance is decided at 70%, intense heat is decided at 30%, and if the variable production pattern is super reach 2, 60%. A chance is determined, and extreme heat is determined at 40%, and if the variable performance pattern is full rotation reach, chance is determined at 50%, and extreme heat is determined at 50%.

The logo announcement determination table has the following features.
For example, in Super Reach 1, chances are more likely to be executed and intense heat is less likely to be executed in the case of a loss than in the case of a win.
For example, in Super Reach 2, Chance is more likely to be executed and Super Heat is less likely to be executed in the case of a loss than in the case of a win.
As a result, the game can be played while the player wishes for the intense heat to be performed.

When comparing Super Reach 1 and Super Reach 2, Chance is more likely to be executed in Super Reach 1, and Super Reach 2 is more likely to be executed in Super Reach 2. This makes it easier to predict which super reach will be executed later, depending on which logo announcement is executed.

In the car group advance notice determination table, if the determination result is a failure and the variable performance pattern is super reach 1, the first car group is determined at 80%, the second car group is determined at 20%, and the variable performance is performed. If the pattern is super reach 2, the first car group is determined at 70%, and the second car group is determined at 30%.

If the determination result is hit, if the variable performance pattern is super reach 1, the first car group is determined at 60%, the second car group is determined at 40%, and the variable performance pattern is super reach 2. For example, the first car group is determined at 50%, and the second car group is determined at 50%. Two car groups are determined.

The car group advance notice determination table has the following features.
For example, in Super Reach 1, the first car group is more likely to be executed and the second car group is less likely to be executed in the case of a loss than in the case of a win.
For example, in Super Reach 2, the first car group is more likely to be executed and the second car group is less likely to be executed in the case of a loss than in the case of a win.
As a result, the game can be played while the player wants the second car group to be executed.

When super reach 1 and super reach 2 are compared, super reach 1 is more likely to be executed in the first car group, and super reach 2 is more likely to be executed in the second car group. As a result, it becomes easy to predict which super reach will be executed later, depending on which car group announcement is executed.

In full rotation reach, the second vehicle group is more likely to be executed than the first vehicle group. As a result, when the second car group is executed, the degree of expectation of the player for the winning game can be raised at once.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, aspects of the logo announcement and the car group announcement will be described.
FIG. 44 shows an aspect of the logo announcement.
(a1) is a scene in which the decorative design images 26a to 26c and the fourth design image 26d are displayed in a variable manner, and (a2) is a scene in which four designs are displayed in the left decorative design image 26a and the right decorative design image 26c. This is the scene where a temporary stop is displayed and reach is formed. The advance notice of the logo is displayed above each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c as soon as the reach is formed. For example, in (a2), a logo image log1 written as chance is displayed. This logo image log1 is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) and then disappears, after which Super Reach 1 and the like can be executed.

(b1) is the same as (a1), and (b2) displays a logo image log2 labeled as intense heat. This logo image log2 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) and then disappears, after which super reach 1 and the like can be executed.

In this way, chance and extreme heat are visually displayed in distinctly different manners, so that it is possible to prevent difficulty in grasping which logo announcement has been executed.

In addition, since the expectations for the winning game are higher in the intense heat than in the chance, for example, the chance is displayed in green and the intense heat is displayed in red, as shown in FIG. good too. As a result, it can be suggested that expectations are high not only for the character content but also for the color.

Also, the voice "Chance" may be output from the speaker 10 along with the display of the chance, or the voice "Super heat" may be output from the speaker 10 along with the display of the intense heat. . As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for winning not only visually but also aurally, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

FIG. 45 shows an example in which a logo announcement is executed in a variable effect in which pseudo-continuation is performed.
(a2) and (b2) are the same as (a2) and (b2) in FIG.
In (a3) and (b3), the "pseudo" image gz suggesting the execution of a pseudo-run is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern image 26b without transitioning to super reach or the like after the logo image is hidden. there is
Even when the "pseudo" image gz is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative design image 26b, the fourth design image 26d continues to be variably displayed.

Then, when the "pseudo" image gz is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern image 26b and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, as shown in (a4) and (b4), "x2 ' is displayed, and each of the decorative design images 26a to 26c which has been temporarily stopped and displayed is variably displayed.
After that, in (a5) and (b5), the same display as in (a2) and (b2) is performed. That is, the formation of the second reach and the display of the logo image for the second time are performed.

The logo image is displayed for the first time in (a2) and (b2), and for the second time in (a5) and (b5). .
In other words, even if the first display is performed in (a2) and (b2) and then the transition to super reach or the like is performed without performing the second display, the second display is performed in (a5) and (b5), After that, even when the game shifts to super reach or the like, the degree of expectation for the execution of the winning game is constant.

On the other hand, as described in the section on pseudo-run announcements, the higher the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the level of expectation. Therefore, although the degree of expectation changes depending on the number of pseudo-runs, it can be said that the degree of expectation is constant regardless of the number of display times for the announcement of the logo at the time of reach formation during execution of the pseudo-run. As a result, a game machine that simply counts the number of pseudo-runs without giving the trouble of having to count both the number of pseudo-runs and the number of times the logo image is displayed is provided, which is easy for the player to understand. be able to.

It should be noted that there is no problem even if the degree of expectation for execution of the winning game is changed by the number of times the logo image is displayed.
Also, as the number of pseudo-runs increases, the logo image may be ranked up (for example, chance→extreme heat).
Further, the logo image may be displayed only when forming the last reach after the pseudo-run, or may be displayed only when forming the first reach.

FIG. 46 shows a mode of advance notice of a group of vehicles.
(a1) and (b1) are scenes in which the decorative design images 26a to 26c and the fourth design image 26d are displayed in a variable manner, and (a2) and (b2) are the left decorative design image 26a and the right decorative design image. At 26c, 4 symbols are temporarily stopped and a ready-to-win state is formed. Unlike the logo announcement, the car group announcement moves an image simulating a plurality of cars from the right end to the left end of the image display device 26 after a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has passed after the reach is formed. is executed in a manner.

(a3) shows the display mode of the first car group, in which a plurality of car group images car1 forming the first car group are displayed. (b3) shows the display mode of the second car group, in which a plurality of car group images car2 forming the second car group are displayed. In either case, it takes about two seconds from the start of display of the vehicle group image to the end of display, and after the display of the vehicle group image is completed, super reach 1 and the like can be executed.

In this way, the first vehicle group and the second vehicle group are visually displayed in distinctly different manners, so that it is possible to prevent difficulty in grasping which vehicle group announcement has been made.

Both the logo announcement and the car group announcement may be determined in one variation effect, or only one of them may be determined.

FIG. 40(a) is a notice determination table 3, which is a table for determining a notice to be executed during super ready-to-win (prediction during super ready-to-win) in the symbol variation game.
The table is stored in the sub ROM 202, and determines the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process, the variation effect pattern, the distribution, and the notice (contents). , and, while referring to the determined variable effect pattern, the notice (content) is determined using the extracted random number value for deciding the notice.

If the determination result is a loss, if the variable effect pattern is super reach 1, conversation (white) is determined at 80%, conversation (red) is determined at 20%, and the variable effect pattern is super reach 2. For example, 90% of the time dialogue (white) is determined and 10% of the time dialogue (red) is determined.

If the determination result is hit, if the variable effect pattern is super reach 1, conversation (white) is determined at 60%, conversation (red) is determined at 40%, and the variable effect pattern is super reach 2. For example, 50% determines dialogue (white) and 50% determines dialogue (red).

The advance notice determination table 3 has the following features.
For example, in Super Reach 1, the conversation (white) is more likely to be executed and the conversation (red) is less likely to be executed in the case of losing than in the case of winning.
For example, in Super Reach 2, the conversation (white) is more likely to be executed and the conversation (red) is less likely to be executed in the case of losing than in the case of winning.
As a result, when the conversation (red) is executed, the degree of expectation of the player for the winning game can be increased, and the game can be played while the player wants the conversation (red) to be executed.

FIG. 40(b) is a notice determination table 4, which is a table for determining a notice to be executed during super ready-to-win (prediction during super ready-to-win) in the symbol variation game. The basic determination method is the same as in FIG. 40(a).

If the determination result is a failure, if the variable performance pattern is super reach 1, cut-in (green) is determined at 90%, cut-in (red) is determined at 10%, and the variable performance pattern is super reach 2. , the cut-in (green) is determined at 90% and the cut-in (red) is determined at 10%.

When the determination result is hit, if the variable performance pattern is super reach 1, cut-in (green) is determined at 70%, cut-in (red) is determined at 30%, and the variable performance pattern is super reach 2. , 60% determines the cut-in (green) and 40% determines the cut-in (red).

The advance notice determination table 4 has the following features.
For example, in Super Reach 1, cut-in (green) is more likely to be performed and cut-in (red) is less likely to be performed in the case of losing than in the case of winning.
For example, in Super Reach 2, a cut-in (green) is more likely to be performed and a cut-in (red) is less likely to be performed in the case of a loss than in the case of a win.
As a result, when the cut-in (red) is executed, the degree of expectation of the player for the winning game can be increased, and the player can play the game while wishing for the cut-in (red) to be executed.

It should be noted that the cut-in notice may not be executed when the effective period has passed without the effect button 14 being operated. As a result, the cut-in notice is not executed unless the performance button 14 is operated, so that the performance button 14 can be positively operated. On the other hand, since the cut-in notice is not executed unless the player who does not want to grasp the degree of expectation of the winning game by the cut-in notice operates the performance button 14, such a player's needs can be met.

FIG. 41(c) is a notice determination table 5, which is a table for deciding a notice (judgment effect) to be executed during super ready-to-win in the symbol variation game. The basic determination method is the same as in FIG. 40(a).

Judge production is a production performed at the timing of informing the judgment result of the special symbol hitting judgment process during super reach, and the player is caused to operate the production button 14 or the production lever 15 (if the operation is not performed If the operation valid period has elapsed), it is an effect that informs whether the judgment result is a win or a loss. Since the button image bg simulating the effect button 14 and the effect lever image leg simulating the effect lever 15 are displayed immediately before notifying the judgment result (see FIG. 48), the display of these images alone will serve as an advance notice. A series of effects from the display of these images to the notification of the judgment result is the judge effect.

If the determination result is a loss, if the variable performance pattern is super reach 1, the performance button is determined at 80%, the performance lever is determined at 20%, and if the variable performance pattern is super reach 2, 90% The effect button is determined by , and the effect lever is determined by 10%.

If the determination result is hit, if the variable performance pattern is super reach 1, the performance button is determined at 60%, the performance lever is determined at 40%, and if the variable performance pattern is super reach 2, 50% The effect button is determined by , and the effect lever is determined by 50%.

The advance notice determination table 5 has the following features.
For example, in Super Reach 1, in the case of losing, it is easier to execute the effect button than in the case of winning, and it is difficult to execute the effect lever.
For example, in Super Reach 2, in the case of losing, it is easier to execute the effect button than in the case of winning, and it is difficult to execute the effect lever.
As a result, when the performance lever is executed, the degree of expectation of the player for the winning game can be increased, and the player can play the game while wishing for the performance lever to be executed.

Note that the judgment effect for operating the effect button 14 or the effect lever 15 may be executed in either super reach 1 or super reach 2 as shown in FIG. 41, or may be executed in either one. You may do so. When one of them is executed, the other may notify the determination result without any operation.

FIG. 47 shows an aspect of cut-in notice.
(a1) and (b1) show a scene transitioned to super reach (for example, super reach 1), and each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c is moved to the upper right of the display area and displayed in reduced size.

(a2) and (b2) are scenes after a predetermined period of time has passed since the transition to super reach (for example, super reach 1), and an operation prompting effect is being executed in the display area. In the operation promotion effect in the cut-in notice, the button image bg imitating the effect button 14 is displayed, and the image "Press!" and the voice "Press!" are not output.

In other words, if the effect button 14 is not operated and the effective period elapses, the cut-in notice is not to be executed. Consideration is also given to players who do not want to grasp the degree of expectation of a winning game. If the cut-in notice is to be executed after the valid period has passed without the operation of the effect button 14 being performed, the image "Press!" or the voice "Press" may be output. As a result, the player can be positively urged to operate the effect button 14. - 特許庁

(a3) shows a cut-in (green) display mode, in which a cut-in image ci1 with "chance" written in green is displayed. (b3) shows a cut-in (red) display mode, and a cut-in image ci2 with "chance" written in red is displayed. In either case, it takes about 3 seconds from the start of the display of the cut-in image to the end of the display, and soon after the display of the cut-in image ends, the judgment result of the special symbol winning judgment processing is notified. become. That is, the cut-in notice is a notice effect that is executed immediately before notifying the determination result.

In this way, the cut-in notice (green) and the cut-in notice (red) are visually displayed in a clearly different manner, so it is possible to prevent difficulty in grasping which cut-in notice has been executed. can.

FIG. 48 shows a mode of judging effects.
(a1) and (b1) are one scene of a conversation notice during Super Reach (for example, Super Reach 2), in which the enemy character chaB is displayed, and the conversation image con4-1 saying "Let's go" is "white". ” is displayed. Also, a voice such as "Let's go" is output from the speaker 10. FIG.

The conversation notice is a notice that is executed in a performance in which the friend character chaA (see FIG. 49, etc.) and the enemy character chaB confront each other. This is an advance notice (details of aspects are shown in FIGS. 49 to 51) suggesting the possibility of a winning game being executed by the character color (for example, white characters, red characters) of the conversation image con4-1.

(a2) and (b2) are scenes in which the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is notified, and an operation prompting effect is executed in these scenes. For example, in (a2), the button image bg and "Press!" On the other hand, in the case of (b2), the lever image leg and "Pull!"

Then, the determination result is notified according to the lapse of the operation effective period, or the operation of the effect button 14 in case of (a2), or the operation of the effect lever 15 in case of (b2).
For example, if it is a win, as shown in (a3) and (b3), the movable body 28 moves to the operating position (executes the movable body motion effect), and each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c appears in the upper right of the display area. 444", the player is notified that the game is a win by displaying a temporary stop. On the other hand, if it is a miss, the movable body 28 does not move to the operating position (remains at the origin position) (not shown), and each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c is temporarily stopped at "454" in the upper right of the display area. You will be notified that you have won.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51, the conversation advance notice will be explained in more detail.
FIGS. 49(a1) and (b1) show the transition to super reach (for example, super reach 2), and the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c are moved to the upper right of the display area and displayed in reduced size.

(a2) shows a scene of the beginning of the conversation notice, and first, the conversation image con1-1 saying "It's a game" is displayed in "white" characters (white characters) from the ally character chaA. Also, a voice saying "It's a game" is output from the speaker 10. FIG.
(b2) is different from (a2) only in that the conversation image con1-2 saying "It's a game" is displayed in "red" characters (red characters). For convenience, "red" characters (red characters) are written in bolder characters than "white" characters (white characters). "Red" characters (red characters) correspond to the conversation (red) in FIG. 40(a), and "white" characters (white characters) correspond to the conversation (white) in FIG. 40(a). there is
It should be noted that, in the conversation notice, there is no difference in the degree of hit expectation due to the sound (sound effect) as in the dialogue notice. For example, a voice saying "It's a game" is output, but the same voice is output regardless of whether the characters are white or red.

(a3) shows the continuation scene of the conversation notice, and in response to the conversation uttered by the friend character chaA in (a2), the conversation image con2-1 from the enemy character chaB saying "There is no chance of winning". is displayed in “white” characters (white characters). Also, a voice saying "There is no chance of winning" is output from the speaker 10. FIG.
(b3) is different from (a3) only in that the conversation image con2-2 saying "There is no chance of winning" is displayed in "red" characters (red characters).

(a4) shows the continuation scene of the conversation notice, and in response to the conversation uttered by the enemy character chaB in (a3), the conversation image con3-1 is displayed by the ally character chaA saying "I won't lose". It is displayed in "white" characters (white characters). Also, a voice saying "I won't lose" is output from the speaker 10. FIG.
(b4) is different from (a4) only in that the conversation image con3-2 saying "I won't lose" is displayed in "red" characters (red characters).

FIG. 50(a5) shows a continuation scene of the conversation preview, in which the enemy character chaB responds to the conversation uttered by the friend character chaA in (a4), and the conversation image con4- 1 is displayed in "white" characters (white characters). Also, a voice such as "Let's go" is output from the speaker 10. FIG.
(b5) is different from (a5) only in that the conversation image con4-2 saying "Let's go" is displayed in "red" characters (red characters).
Note that (a5), (b5), (a6), (b6), (a7), and (b7) are the same scenes as in FIG. 48, so description thereof will be omitted.

(a7) When the judgment result is notified in (b7), in (a8), the friendly character chaA is displayed again, and the conversation image con5-1 saying "I got the results of my training" is replaced with "white" characters ( white letters). In addition, a voice such as "I have achieved results in my training" is output from the speaker 10 .
(b8) is different from (a8) only in that the conversation image con5-2 saying "I got good results from my training" is displayed in "red" characters (red characters).

FIG. 51(a9) shows a continuation scene of the conversation preview, in which the enemy character chaB responds to the conversation uttered by the ally character chaA in (a8), and the conversation image con6 says "Stunning...". -1 is displayed in "white" characters (white characters). Also, a voice such as “stunning” is output from the speaker 10 .
(b9) is different from (a9) only in that the conversation image con6-2 saying "excellent" is displayed in "red" characters (red characters).

The execution period from (a2) (b2), which is the start of the conversation advance notice, to (a9, b9), which is the end of the conversation advance notice, is, for example, about 25 seconds.
In other words, the execution period is longer than the execution period (2.5 seconds) of the dialogue announcement (red) and the execution period (5.5 seconds) of the dialogue (red) two stages.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the redundant notice of the lines performed before reaching the reach, and the advance notice of the conversation performed before the judge production stimulates the sense of tension as to whether or not the player will win for a long period of time. can be improved.

In addition, with conversation notices that do not change the hit expectation depending on the number of times the conversation (red) is displayed, there is no need to count the number of times the conversation (red) is displayed over a long execution period, so the player can concentrate on the conversation notice. can be made On the other hand, in the dialogue announcement, in which the expectation of winning changes depending on the number of times the dialogue (red) is displayed, it is necessary to count the number of times the dialogue (red) is displayed over a short execution period. can draw attention.

Then, at (a10) and (b10), each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c is temporarily stopped and displayed at "444", and the production button 14 vibrates for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (executing the button vibration production at the time of winning). , (a11) and (b11), each of the decorative design images 26a to 26c is confirmed and displayed as "444", and the vibration of the production button 14 is stopped.

As described above, in the advance notice of conversation, the friend character chaA and the enemy character chaB interact with each other, and the difference in the character color of the conversation image suggests the degree of expectation for the winning game. Specifically, the "red" characters (red characters) than the "white" characters (white characters) suggest that the expectations for the winning game are higher, so other notices (for example, serif notices and Similar to the pending look-ahead effect), it is possible to have a common recognition that “red” has a high degree of expectation. As a result, the player can play the game while wishing that the characters of "red" (red characters) are displayed.

Also, in (a8), (b8), (a9) and (b9) after informing the judgment result (hit) in (a7) and (b7), the character color before (a7) and (b7) will be followed. bottom. In other words, after (a7), the conversation notices of (a8) and (a9) are continued with "white" characters (white characters), and after (b8), "red" characters (red characters) are used ( b8) The conversation notice of (b9) is executed. As a result, a sense of unity can be given until the final display is made, and the player can shift to a winning game without feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since it is only necessary to set the entire conversation notice to the same color, simple processing can be performed, and a reduction in control load can be expected.

In addition, "white" characters (white characters) in the conversation notice may be displayed using only white characters. Only black or the like may be used.
Similarly, the "red" characters (red characters) in the conversation notice may be displayed using only red characters, or the entire characters are red in order to improve visibility, but the characters are Only the edge may be black or the like.
In any case, using a normal color means that some or all of the characters in the conversation notice are white, and using a specific color means that some or all of the characters in the conversation notice are red. It is used.

49 to 51 illustrate only the case of winning and did not illustrate the case of losing, but in the case of losing (a8) (b8), (a9) (b9) without performing ( After announcing the loss in a7) and (b7), the combination of the losing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed in (a10) and (b10), and the combination of the losing symbols is confirmed and displayed in (a11) and (b11). As a result, especially when the conversation notice is executed with "red" characters (red characters), (b8) and (b9) are also executed with "red" characters (red characters). It is possible to prevent people from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the case of a loss, the conversation advance notice in (a8), (b8), (a9), and (b9) may be performed. As a result, it becomes easy to recognize in which character color a conversation notice was executed even after a failure is notified, and to facilitate confirmation when checking back how much the notice with a high degree of expectation was made. can be done.

Also, in (a8), (b8), (a9), and (b9), the conversation notice may be uniformly executed with "white" characters (white characters). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a strange expectation (for example, further development of reach) while entertaining the player with the advance notice of the conversation even after the notification of the determination result.

Further, for example, when the conversation notice of FIG. 49(a2) is set to once, the number of conversation notices may be determined arbitrarily. For example, a conversation notice consisting of four times or a conversation notice consisting of six times may be used. Either one of these may be provided, or both of them may be provided. Note that, regardless of the number of times, the execution period is set to be longer than the execution period (for example, 5.5 seconds) of two stages of dialogue (red) in the dialogue announcement.

FIG. 52 is a simple time chart (normal game state) summarizing the above-described advance notice effects.
In the time chart, the relation between the degree of expectation for winning and the degree of expectation for winning due to the difference in the advance notice effects will be mainly described.

When the change starts at timing T1, the dialogue announcement can be executed. In case 1, above (red) serif (serif image SE1) is executed, and in case 2, above (red) serif (serif image SE1) and below (red) serif (serif image SE2) are executed. .
In this case, the degree of expectation for winning is higher in Case 2, and when the advance notice of dialogue is compared by dialogue (red), the greater the number of dialogues, the higher the degree of expectation for winning.

When the reach (normal reach) occurs at timing T2, the logo notice can be executed. In case 1, the chance (logo image log1) is executed once, and in case 2, the pseudo-run (for example, pseudo-run 3) is executed, and the chance (logo image log1) is executed three times.
In this case, when comparing the number of executions of the chance (logo image log1) excluding the number of pseudo-runs, the expectation of winning is equal (no change) in case 1 and case 2. FIG. In other words, the degree of expectation for winning does not change depending on the number of times unlike the announcement of dialogue, but the degree of expectation for winning is constant regardless of whether the logo announcement is executed once or three times.

When super reach occurs at timing T3, a conversation announcement can be executed. Case 1 consists of a total of four conversations: conversation 1 (red) friend (character), conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), conversation 3 (red) friend (character), conversation 4 (red) enemy (character). The announcement is executed, and in case 2, conversation 1 (red) friend (character), conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), conversation 3 (red) friend (character), conversation 4 (red) enemy (character), conversation 5 (red) ally (character), conversation 6 (red) enemy (character), a total of 6 conversation announcements were executed.
In this case, the winning expectation is the same (no change) in both case 1 and case 2. In other words, unlike the serif notice, the hit expectation varies depending on the number of times. I don't have the degree. For example, whether the conversation (red) is displayed once or twice, the probability of winning is constant. However, the degree of expectation is constant.

When the judgment performance execution timing comes at timing T4, the judgment performance can be executed. In case 1, the effect button is executed in the judgment effect, and in case 2, the effect lever is executed in the judge effect.
In this case, the winning expectation is higher in Case 2.

At the timing T5, when it comes to the timing of notification of the determination result in the judge performance, the determination result is notified. If a hit is announced in the notification of the determination result, a conversation announcement can be further executed (see FIGS. 50(a8) and (b8) and FIGS. 51(a9) and (b9)). In case 1, a conversation announcement consisting of a total of two times, conversation 1 (red) friend (character) and conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), is executed. In case 2, conversation 1 (red) friend (character) is executed. , conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), conversation 3 (red) ally (character), and conversation 4 (red) enemy (character).
In this case, since the determination result has already been notified at the timing T5, the expectation level for winning is equal (no change) in both case 1 and case 2, and the expectation level for the execution of the probability variable gaming state is also equal (no change) ). That is, in this scene, whether the conversation notice (red) is executed twice or four times, the degree of expectation for winning is constant, and the degree of expectation for the execution of the variable probability game state is also constant. After that, at timing T6, the definite stop occurs.

In addition, when the hit determination result is notified at timing T5, a movable body motion effect (see FIG. 48) and a hit button vibration effect (see FIG. 51) are executed. This is an effect that is executed when notification is given, and the execution expectation level does not change depending on the number of conversations (red) in the conversation announcement. For example, whether the conversation (red) is displayed once or twice, the degree of expectation for the execution of the effect is constant. The execution expectation of the production is constant regardless of the performance. That is, regardless of the number of times the conversation (red) is executed (displayed), the execution expectation of the specific effect (for example, movable body action effect, hit button vibration effect) that is executed after the end of the conversation announcement is constant. be. As a result, the trouble of counting the number of times the conversation (red) is executed (displayed) can be saved, and the player can concentrate on the advance notice of the conversation.

In this way, in the variable effect where "red" is executed in the dialogue notice and "red" is executed in the conversation notice, the degree of hit expectation changes according to the difference in the number of executions in the dialogue notice, and the conversation notice is executed. It was made so that the hit expectation does not change due to the difference in the number of times. In other words, from timing T1 to timing T2, the player's interest lies in whether or not the game will reach reach, and the player is watching various advance notice effects. In such a scene, by making the degree of expectation for winning different depending on the number of times the line notice (red) is executed, the player can predict the subsequent development (for example, whether or not Super Reach will be executed). can be made easier. The same idea applies to the button vibration notice (see FIG. 37) that can be executed in the scene.

On the other hand, from timing T3 to timing T4, the player's interest is in whether or not the game will be successful, and the player pays more attention to the "color" than the number of times the notice is executed. In other words, if it is a cut-in notice, I want "red" to be executed (displayed) rather than "green", and if it is a conversation notice, I want "red" to be executed (displayed) rather than "white". Since it is a scene where a player wins or loses, it is possible to prevent the game machine from becoming incomprehensible to the player due to the difference in the degree of expectation for winning due to the difference in the number of executions of the advance notice before simply announcing whether the game is a win or a loss.
In other words, depending on the scene (according to the player's attention), it is set whether the number of times the notice is executed or the color of the notice is emphasized, so the notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner throughout the variable effect It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the dialogue announcement executed from timing T1 to timing T2, a difference in the degree of expectation for hitting the dialogue (white) and dialogue (red) was provided by the sound (sound effect), but it was executed from timing T3 to timing T4. In the announcement of the conversation, we tried not to make a difference in the degree of hit expectation due to the sound (sound effect) between the white letters and the red letters.
As a result, it is possible to execute suitable sound effects in accordance with each scene. For example, in a scene where there is an interest in whether or not it will become a reach (dialogue announcement), by providing a difference in the degree of expectation of hitting by sound (differences due to display and sound), the development after the reach will be more interesting. can be done.
On the other hand, in a scene where there is an interest in whether or not the player will win (conversation notice), by not providing a difference in the degree of expectation of winning by sound (differing only by the display), more information than necessary is given, and the player's concentration is improved. can be prevented from being hindered.

FIG. 53 is a simple time chart (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) summarizing the above-described advance notice effects.
In the time chart, the relation between the degree of expectation for winning and the degree of expectation for winning due to the difference in the advance notice effects will be mainly described.

In the time-saving game state and the probability variable game state, it is easy to hold and store, so if it is a loss, it is easy to execute super-shortening fluctuation or short-shortening fluctuation, and if it is a win, it is easy to execute super reach. . In other words, when Super Reach is performed, there is a tendency that winning is likely to be announced at timing T4.
In line with this tendency, the notice effects are also mainly executed during timing T1 and timing T2. And if it is "red", it makes it easier for super reach to be executed.

From the timing T2 to the timing T3, as in the normal game state, a conversation announcement can be executed. Even in this scene, even if the conversation notice (red) is executed 4 times (Case 1), even if the conversation notice (red) is executed 6 times (Case 2), the winning expectation is equal (no change). there is
Further, timing T3 to timing T4 and timing T4 to timing T5 are the same as those in the normal game state, so description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in the time-saving gaming state and the probability variable gaming state, if it is a loss, it is easy to execute super-shortening fluctuations and shortening fluctuations. It makes the difference hard to implement. For example, we are trying not to execute dialogue announcements. As a result, it is possible to execute an advance notice in line with the characteristics of the game state, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, an example of display of the number of games (fluctuation pattern 2) will be described.
FIG. 54 is an example of updated display of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q when variation pattern 2 is executed. For convenience of explanation, some items displayed on the image display device 26 are omitted, but they are actually displayed.

First, at timing T1, variation starts. At this time, the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q are displayed together. 26q is displayed as "798 games" in the upper left of the display area.
In addition, each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c is variably displayed, the variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 26o, and the suspension icon is displayed in the first start port first suspension ball image display area 26g. ing.

Then, when the timing T2 is reached with the passage of the fluctuation time, commands 19, 21, 22 (see FIGS. 10 and 11) are transmitted from the main control board 100, and the effect control board 200 indicates that the command has been received. there is

Then, when timing T3 is reached, each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c is fixedly displayed when "528" is lost, and the pattern variation game is ended (variation is stopped).
At this time, the number-of-games counter image 26p is decremented by 1 to become "99 more", and the number-of-games image 26q is incremented by 1 to become "799 games".
Further, the variable icon is deleted from the variable icon display area 26o.

Although not shown, at this time, the display of the number of symbol variation games on the external information display displays "799".
In other words, "the value indicated by the number-of-games image 26q" = "display of the number of times of symbol-variation games on the external information display". The number of symbol variation games can be recognized.

Next, an example relating to the display of the number of games (variation pattern 3) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 55 is an example of updated display of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q when variation pattern 3 is executed.

First, at timing T1, variation starts. At this time, the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q are displayed together. 26q is displayed as "798 games" in the upper left of the display area.
In addition, each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c is variably displayed, the variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 26o, and the suspension icon is displayed in the first start port first suspension ball image display area 26g. ing.

Then, when the timing T2 is reached with the lapse of the fluctuation time, the normal reach with 5 symbols is started. Even if normal reach is started, both the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q remain displayed.

Then, when the timing T3 is reached with the passage of the fluctuation time, commands 19, 21, 22 (see FIGS. 10 and 11) are transmitted from the main control board 100, and the effect control board 200 indicates that the command has been received. there is

Then, when timing T4 is reached, each decorative symbol image is fixedly displayed when "535" is lost, and the symbol variation game is ended (variation is stopped).
At this time, the number-of-games counter image 26p is decremented by 1 to become "99 more", and the number-of-games image 26q is incremented by 1 to become "799 games".
Further, the variable icon is deleted from the variable icon display area 26o.

Although not shown, at this time, the display of the number of symbol variation games on the external information display displays "799".
In other words, the value indicated by the number-of-games image 26q=the number of symbol-variation games displayed on the external information display device. The number of times can be recognized.

In addition, normal reach has a high selection ratio at the time of losing, and it is difficult to execute multiple notices. It can be said that there is a low risk of this happening (for example, the display of the number-of-games image 26q makes it difficult to see the preview image).
As a result, display (preferred display) of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q can be realized according to the situation.

Next, an example relating to the display of the number of games (variation pattern 4) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 57 is an example of updated display of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q when variation pattern 4 is executed.

First, at timing T1, variation starts. At this time, the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q are displayed together. 26q is displayed as "798 games" in the upper left of the display area.
In addition, each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c is variably displayed, the variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 26o, and the suspension icon is displayed in the first start port first suspension ball image display area 26g. ing.

Then, when the timing T2 is reached with the lapse of the fluctuation time, the normal reach with 5 symbols is started. Even if normal reach is started, both the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q remain displayed.

Then, at timing T3 during normal reach execution, the vehicle group announcement is executed.
At the timing T3, the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q are not displayed so as not to interfere with the announcement of the car group using the entire display area.

Then, when the execution of the car group advance notice is completed, it develops into super reach (denoted as SP reach) at timing T4. Even if it develops into super reach, both the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q remain hidden. Also, at this timing, the pending icon displayed in the first starting port first pending ball image display area 26g is hidden. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the effect related to super reach from being impaired.

Then, when the super reach is executed and timing T5 is reached, the determination result of the special symbol winning determination process is notified. Since the variation pattern 4 in this example corresponds to a loss, a temporary stop is made with an image such as "losing..." and a mode in which each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c indicates a loss ("565" in this example). Notification of the determination result is executed by being displayed. The number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q remain hidden even when the determination result is notified.

Then, the notification of the determination result is executed for a predetermined period of time, and when timing T6 is reached, the display of the background switching image is started. This background switching image is an image that is displayed over the entire display area for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) when the background image during super reach is returned to the background image at the start of the fluctuation. This includes images, fusuma images, blackouts, whiteouts, and the like.

Then, when timing T7 is reached, the display of the background switching image ends. When the display of the background switching image ends, the number-of-games counter image 26p, the number-of-games image 26q, and the pending icon image are displayed. That is, the display of "100 more times", the display of "798 games", and the display of the pending icon in the first starting port first pending ball image display area 26g are performed. Further, each decorative pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed at "565". That is, at the timing T7, the number-of-games counter image 26p, the number-of-games image 26q, and the pending icon image, which have been hidden, are displayed again (become visible at the same timing).

Then, when the timing T8 is reached with the passage of the fluctuation time, commands 19, 21, 22 (see FIGS. 10 and 11) are transmitted from the main control board 100, and the effect control board 200 indicates that the command has been received. there is

Then, when timing T9 is reached, each decorative symbol image is fixedly displayed when "565" is lost, and the symbol variation game is ended (variation is stopped).
At this time, although not shown, the number-of-games counter image 26p is decremented by 1 to become "99 more", and the number-of-games image 26q is incremented by 1 to become "799 games".
Further, the variable icon is deleted from the variable icon display area 26o.

Although not shown, at this time, the display of the number of symbol variation games on the external information display displays "799".
In other words, "the value indicated by the number-of-games image 26q" = "display of the number of times of symbol-variation games on the external information display". The number of symbol variation games can be recognized.

Also, in Super Reach, even if you lose (and of course win), multiple notices are likely to be executed. For example, display of the number-of-games image 26q makes it difficult to see the preview image). Therefore, the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q are not displayed from timing T3 to timing T7.
As a result, display (preferred display) of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q can be realized according to the situation.

In the variation effect based on the variation pattern 4 (loss, super reach 1), the number-of-games image 26q is displayed when timing T7 is reached. , the number-of-games image 26q may not be displayed at timing T7. In this case, the variable effect based on the variable pattern 5 (losing, super reach 2) is finished, and displayed when execution of the variable effect based on the next variable pattern is started.
Further, when timing T7 is reached, the number-of-games counter image 26p, the number-of-games image 26q, and the pending icon image, which have been hidden, are redisplayed. good. For example, the pending icon image may be redisplayed first and the game number image 26q may be redisplayed later, or vice versa.

Next, an example relating to the display of the number of games (variation pattern 10) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 57 is an example of updated display of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q when the variation pattern 10 is executed. It should be noted that FIG. 57 is different from FIG. 56 only in whether it is a win or a loss, so the explanation will be omitted as appropriate.

The timing T1 to timing T5 are the same as in FIG. Then, when timing T5 is reached, the determination result of the special symbol winning determination process is notified. Since the variation pattern 10 in this example corresponds to a win, the images such as "WIN" and the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win ("555" in this example). Thus, notification of the determination result is executed. The number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q remain hidden even when the determination result is notified.

Then, when the display of the background switching image is completed at timing T7, the decorative symbol images 26a to 26c are temporarily stopped and displayed without displaying the number-of-games counter image 26p, the number-of-games image 26q, and the pending icon image. After that, various commands are received and confirmed and displayed.

In other words, since the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q are cleared by winning a winning game, there is no point in redisplaying them at that timing. Since the degree of attention is higher for rainbow-colored display and rainbow-colored light emission, the display is not performed from timing T7 to timing T9.
As a result, display (preferred display) of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q can be realized according to the situation.

In the case of winning, the background switching between timing T6 and timing T7 may be unnecessary. In other words, the display screen at the timing T5 may be confirmed and displayed without switching to shift to the winning game.

In the variable effect based on the variable pattern 10 (hit, super reach 1), the game number image 26q is not displayed after timing T7, but for example, in the variable effect based on the variable pattern 11 (hit, super reach 2) , the number-of-games image 26q may be displayed after timing T7. In this case, display may be performed from timing T7, and non-display may be performed at timing T9.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, an example relating to the display of the number of games (fluctuation pattern 6) will be described.
FIG. 58 is an example of updated display of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q when variation pattern 6 is executed.

First, at timing T1, variation starts. At this time, the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q are displayed together. 26q is displayed as "798 games" in the upper left of the display area.
In addition, each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c is variably displayed, the variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 26o, and the suspension icon is displayed in the first start port first suspension ball image display area 26g. ing.

Then, when the timing T2 is reached as the fluctuation time elapses, the pseudo-continuous swing is executed. Pseudo consecutive fanning means that a special pattern written as "pseudo" of pseudo consecutive appears newly as the middle decorative design image 26b, and the special design is placed between the left decorative design image 26a and the right decorative design image 26c. It is a production that encourages whether to display a temporary stop. If the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed between the left decorative symbol image 26a and the right decorative symbol image 26c, the pseudo continuous effect is executed, and if the special symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed.
Further, when the pseudo streak is started, the number-of-games counter image 26p continues to be displayed, but the number-of-games image 26q is hidden.

Then, when the pseudo-continuous fanning is completed and timing T3 is reached, the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed between the left decorative symbol image 26a and the right decorative symbol image 26c to generate a pseudo-continuous effect, and from timing T4, the pseudo-continuous effect is generated. A second variation in production is initiated.

At timing T4, when the second variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, for example, "x2" indicating the second variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. Note that the number-of-games image 26q remains hidden.

In other words, the pseudo-continuous effect is a single symbol variation game, but since it is an effect as if multiple variations are being performed, the game number image 26q, which is not updated, remains displayed. If there is, there is a risk that the goodness of the pseudo-continuous effect will be lost. For example, no matter how many pseudo-continuous effects are executed, if the game number image 26q is not updated and displayed, it will be easy to perceive that the currently executed variation is a pseudo-continuous effect. .
On the other hand, by hiding the number-of-games image 26q from the timing T2 to the timing T5, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the goodness of the pseudo-continuous effect is spoiled.

In addition, in a situation where the number-of-games counter image 26p is displayed, the number-of-games counter image 26p may also be hidden.
Also, although the game number image 26q is hidden from timing T2 to timing T5, it may be hidden from timing T2 to timing T4 and displayed from timing T4 to timing T5, or vice versa. may
In particular, the game number image 26q may remain displayed from timing T2 to timing T5. As a result, it is possible to positively suggest the pseudo-continuous effect.
The contents from the timing T5 to the timing T7 are substantially the same as the contents explained with reference to FIG. 55, so the explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, an example (comparison) of the display mode of each game count display will be described. The display mode referred to here corresponds to color, shape, size, typeface, occurrence of separate notification effect, and the like.

The number-of-games image 26q is "0 games" as shown in (a1), "100 games" as shown in (a2), and "500 games" as shown in (a3). "The display mode does not change between when it is a game and when it is a game.
In other words, the display mode does not change due to the number of milestones or an increase in the number of times, and it is positioned to play the same role as the external information display.

The number-of-games counter image 26p is displayed in such a way that it does not change between "100 more times" when the display starts as shown in (b1) and "50 more times" as shown in (b2). However, as shown in (b3), the display mode changes when it reaches "10 more times". After that, the change continues until "0 more times" is reached. This makes it easier to prevent the player from losing money by quitting the game in the situation of "10 more games to go".

As shown in (c1), the remaining number image 26s does not change in display form from "99 remaining times" to "11 remaining times" when the display is started. As shown, the display mode changes when "remaining 10 times" is reached. In addition, in conjunction with this, a separate notification effect (countdown image 26t) is generated to emphasize that the number of remaining times of the time-saving game state is small. Thereafter, the change continues until "LAST" is reached, and a separate notification effect (countdown image 26t) is generated each time the change starts.

In this way, a display mode corresponding to the role of each game number display is executed.
For example, in the game number image 26q, if the display mode is changed in the "500" game (a situation in which a winning game has not been obtained for a long time), the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable not to change the display mode of the number-of-games image 26q regardless of the number of games played.
For example, in the number-of-games counter image 26p, an inexperienced player may quit the game unless the display mode is changed to "10 times left". Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable to change the display mode in "10 more times".
For example, in the remaining number of times image 26s, if the display mode of "10 remaining times" is not changed, the game machine becomes uninteresting in that the time-saving game state is finished indifferently. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable to separately generate a notification effect (countdown image 26t) while changing the display mode at "remaining 10 times".

Next, an example of the update display of the remaining count image 26s will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG.
In addition, FIG. 60 is, for example, an example of an update display when the special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 27b in the time-saving gaming state A, and FIG. They are an example of update display when special symbols are variably displayed on the special symbol display 27b, and an example of update display when the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 27a.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the second special symbol display 27b variably displays the special symbols, and the image display device 26 variably displays the decorative symbol images 26a to 26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the remaining number image 26s is displayed as "99 remaining times".

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the second special symbol display device 27b confirms and displays the special symbol (only the middle segment is displayed), and the image display device 26 displays each decorative symbol. The images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are confirmed and displayed. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s is displayed as "98 times left". The remaining number image 26s may be updated and displayed by receiving a special symbol confirmation command, or may be updated and displayed by preparing a dedicated command and receiving the dedicated command.

Then, in FIG. 60(c), the reserved icon displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k in FIG. The display device 27b variably displays the special design, and the image display device 26 variably displays the decorative design images 26a to 26c and the fourth design image 26d. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s is displayed as "98 times left".

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 60(d), the second special symbol display device 27b confirms and displays the special symbol (only the middle segment is displayed), and the image display device 26 displays each decorative symbol. The images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are confirmed and displayed. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s is displayed as "97 times remaining".

On the other hand, in FIG. 61(a), the second special symbol display device 27b is used to variably display the special symbols. Start opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, second starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26m, second starting opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26n is a situation in which the pending icon is not displayed. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s is displayed as "90 times remaining".

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the second special design display 27b is used to confirm and display the special design (only the middle segment is displayed), and the image display device 26 displays each decorative design. The images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are confirmed and displayed. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s is displayed as "89 times remaining". The contents up to this point are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 60 .

Then, in FIG. 61(c), the reserved icon displayed in the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g in FIG. The display device 27a variably displays the special symbol, and the image display device 26 variably displays the fourth symbol image 26d. On the other hand, the decorative symbol images 26a to 26c are not variably displayed, but are temporarily stopped on the spot with the symbol combination of "612" confirmed and displayed in FIG. 61(b). That is, when a non-optimal game is performed in the time-saving game state A (when a game ball is won in the first start port 21), the decorative symbol images 26a to 26c are displayed temporarily without being displayed in a variable manner ( The occurrence of this discomfort suggests that the game is being played in a non-optimal manner. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s is displayed as "89 times remaining".

In addition, in the center of the display area, a right-hand hitting suggestion image 26u is displayed to prompt right-hand hitting. there is In addition, the display of the right hitting suggestion image 26u continues until the game ball is detected by the gate detection sw20a or the second start hole detection sw22a, for example.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 61(d), the first special symbol display 27a confirms and displays the special symbol (only the middle segment is displayed), and the image display device 26 displays each decorative symbol. The images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are confirmed and displayed. In other words, "612" which has been temporarily stopped and displayed is fixedly displayed as it is. At this time, the remaining number image 26s is displayed as "88 times remaining".

That is, in updating and displaying the remaining number image 26s, if the second special symbol display device 27b, which is the optimum game, is used to variably display the special symbols, the standard symbol variation game is executed, which is not the optimal game. When the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 27a, a special production mode different from the above standard (the decorative symbol images 26a to 26c are temporarily stopped on the spot without being variably displayed, and the right The symbol variation game is executed with the display of the hitting suggestion image 26u). Thus, even if the same remaining number image 26s is updated and displayed, it is possible to grasp which of the first special symbol display device 27a and the second special symbol display device 27b causes the remaining number image 26s to be updated and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably update and display the remaining count image 26s. In addition, it is possible to prompt the player to play an optimum game due to the difference in the execution mode of the symbol variation game.

In addition, although FIG. 60 and FIG. 61 have been described as an example of the time saving game state A, the same thing may be performed in the time saving game state B or the variable probability game state.

Next, an example of updated display of the number-of-games image 26q will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG.
Incidentally, FIG. 62 is an example of an update display when the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 27a in the normal game state, for example, and FIG. 63 is an example of the second special symbol in the normal game state. This is an example of updated display when the special symbols are variably displayed on the display 27b.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the first special symbol display 27a variably displays the special symbols, and the image display device 26 variably displays the decorative symbol images 26a to 26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the number-of-games image 26q is displayed as "51 games".

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the first special symbol display 27a confirms and displays the special symbol (only the middle segment is displayed), and the image display device 26 displays each decorative symbol. The images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are confirmed and displayed. At this time, the number-of-games image 26q is displayed as "52 games".

Then, in FIG. 62(c), the reserved icon displayed in the first start opening first reserved ball image display area 26g in FIG. The display device 27a variably displays the special design, and the image display device 26 variably displays the decorative design images 26a to 26c and the fourth design image 26d. At this time, the number-of-games image 26q is displayed as "52 games".

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the first special symbol display 27a confirms and displays the special symbol (only the middle segment is displayed), and the image display device 26 displays each decorative symbol. The images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are confirmed and displayed. At this time, the number-of-games image 26q is displayed as "53 games".

On the other hand, in FIG. 63(a), the 100th symbol variation game in the time-saving gaming state A is finished, and the ending effect is executed. At this time, the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, the second starting opening third reserved ball image display area 26m, the second starting opening fourth reserved ball A holding icon is displayed in the image display area 26n, and the first starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first starting opening third reserved ball image display area. 26i, the first start opening fourth reserved ball image display area 26j does not display a reserved icon.
It should be noted that, at the time when the confirmation display is performed in FIG. 63(a), the game state has shifted from the time-saving game state A to the normal game state.

Then, when the ending effect is executed for a predetermined time, a background image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, and an image of "Return to left-handed" is displayed to encourage left-handed. Also, at this time, the image display device 26 displays the number-of-games image 26q. Since the time-saving gaming state A has been executed, the number-of-games image 26q is displayed as "100 games".

Also, execution of the symbol variation game corresponding to the reserved icon displayed in the second start opening first reserved ball image display area 26k is started. That is, the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are displayed in a variable manner.

On the other hand, the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 26o, and the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l, and the second starting opening No pending icon is displayed in the third pending ball image display area 26m, either. That is, when the special symbols are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 27b in the normal game state, the variable icon display area 26o and each reserved ball image display area are made irregular (non-display). , intended to suggest a special circumstance.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 63(c), the second special design indicator 27b is used to confirm and display the special design (only the middle segment is displayed), and the image display device 26 displays each decorative design. The images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are confirmed and displayed. At this time, the number-of-games image 26q is displayed as "101 games".

Then, as shown in FIG. 63(d), execution of the symbol variation game corresponding to the reserved icon displayed in the second start opening second reserved ball image display area 26l is started.

That is, in updating and displaying the number-of-games image 26q, if the special symbols are variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 27a, the standard symbol variation game is executed, but the special symbols are displayed by the second special symbol display device 27b. is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol variation game is executed in a special presentation mode (icons are not displayed) different from the above-described standard. Thus, even if the same number-of-games image 26q is updated and displayed, it is possible to grasp which of the first special symbol display device 27a and the second special symbol display device 27b causes the update-display of the number-of-games image 26q. Therefore, the game number image 26q can be preferably updated and displayed.

It should be noted that the phenomenon that the special symbols are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 27b in the normal game state is not limited to the transition of the game state. It may be due to the ball entering.

Also, in FIG. 63, an example of shifting from the time-saving game state A to the normal game state has been described, but the same thing may be performed when shifting from the time-saving game state B to the normal game state. Also, as the probability variation gaming state, when adopting the so-called ST type, the same thing may be performed at the time of transition from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Also, in FIG. 63, the variable icon display area 26o and each reserved ball image display area are assumed to be in an irregular mode (not displayed), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pending icon in each pending ball image display area is not displayed, but the variable icon may be displayed in the variable icon display area 26o each time the symbol variable game is started.

Also, in FIG. 63, the variable icon display area 26o and each reserved ball image display area are assumed to be in an irregular mode (not displayed), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable icon of the variable icon display area 26o and the pending icon of each pending ball image display area may be displayed in a display mode different from the variable icon and the pending icon during the time saving game state. For example, in the time-saving gaming state, the variable icon and the pending icon are displayed in yellow, but in the scene of FIG. 63, they may be displayed in gray.

Next, an example of the number-of-games image 26q for each production stage will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in (a1), in the river stage (corresponding to production mode A in FIG. 7), for example, the variable icon and the pending icon imitating fish are displayed, and each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern are displayed. Arabic numerals are used for the image 26d.
On the other hand, as shown in (b1), in the castle stage (corresponding to the production mode B in FIG. 7), for example, the variable icon and the suspended icon imitating scrolls are displayed, and the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c and the third Chinese numerals are used for the 4-pattern image 26d.

In this way, the aspect of the variable icon, the pending icon, the decorative symbol images 26a to 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d is different for each production mode, but the display aspect (size) of the number-of-games image 26q , color, typeface, display position, etc.) are unchanged, and the display mode is the same regardless of the production mode.
This prevents the game number image 26q, which simply displays the number of games, from becoming unnecessarily conspicuous.

There is no problem even if the number-of-games image 26q is changed for each effect mode. For example, in production mode A, it may be displayed in Arabic numerals, and in production mode B, it may be displayed in Chinese numerals.

Next, an example of how the number-of-games image 26q is updated will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG.

As described above, the number-of-games image 26q is updated and displayed when the effect control board 200 receives the number-of-games display update command (command 21).
For example, as shown in FIG. 65, when a game number display update command (command 21) is received at timing T2, the game number image 26q is updated and displayed at timing T3, and fluctuation is stopped (determined display).

FIG. 66 shows an irregular case when the game number display update command (command 21) cannot be received normally.
That is, when the command for updating the display of the number of games (command 21) cannot be received normally at timing T2, the confirmation display is performed at timing T3, but the game number image 26q is not updated, and "50" displayed at timing T1 is displayed. Game" remains.

Then, when a special symbol variation pattern designation command (for example, command 15) is received at timing T4, execution of the symbol variation game is started at timing T5, and the game number image 26q is updated and displayed as "51 games". do. Although not shown, when the game number display update command (command 21) is normally received in the symbol variation game started at timing T5, the game number image 26q becomes "52 games". That is, in one symbol variation game, the update display of the game number image 26q is performed twice.

In this way, when the game number display update command (command 21) cannot be received normally, the game number image 26q is updated and displayed using the command transmitted at the start of the next symbol variation game. . As a result, the non-update period from the stop to the start of the next symbol variation game can be minimized, so that the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable.

FIG. 67 shows a modified example of FIG. 66, which is the same as FIG. 66 in that the game number display update command (command 21) could not be normally received at timing T2, but the special symbol variation pattern at timing T4. The difference from FIG. 66 is that the game number image 26q is not updated and displayed even if the designated command (for example, command 15) is normally received.

In this case, at timing T6, the command for updating the display of the number of games in the next symbol variation game (command 21) is normally received, so that the update display for two games is performed collectively. That is, "50 games" is displayed at the start of the symbol variation game at timing T1, and "50 games" is displayed at the start of the symbol variation game at timing T5. "52 games" is displayed.

In this way, if the game number display update command (command 21) cannot be received normally, the game number display update command (command 21) transmitted when the next symbol variation game is stopped is used to generate the game number image. 26q is updated and displayed. As a result, it is possible to perform a single process of receiving the game number display update command (command 21) and updating and displaying the game number image 26q, thereby simplifying the control process.

Note that the above-described embodiment is merely an example, and can be modified as appropriate.
For example, the remaining number image 26s and the number-of-games image 26q are updated and displayed based on commands received when the symbol variation game is stopped, but may be updated and displayed based on commands received when the symbol variation game is started. .

For example, the game number image 26q is displayed on the image display device 26 when it is in the normal game state, and it is not displayed when it is in the time saving game state A, B, or the variable probability game state. The game number image 26q may be displayed on the image display device 26 in the game state.

For example, although the number-of-games image 26q is displayed on the image display device 26, other information displayed on the external information display device may be displayed on the image display device 26 as well. Specifically, the number of winning games and the number of times of shifting to the variable probability gaming state may be displayed.

For example, the display of the number-of-games image 26q may be hidden regardless of the player's intention, but it may be possible to hide the game number image 26q at the player's will. For example, it may be possible to hide the display at an arbitrary timing by operating the effect button 14 . This makes it possible to meet the needs of various players.

For example, although the decoration part 2a does not perform any particular effect, the decoration part 2a may perform the effect. Specifically, an effect by light emission may be performed, or an effect by movement may be performed. In addition, the effect by light emission and the effect by movement may be positioned as an advance notice effect suggesting the possibility that a winning game is given, or may be positioned as a mere effect executed during a winning game.

In addition, when an effect (announcement effect) by light emission is executed, while the decorative portion 2a is conspicuous due to the light emission, there is a possibility that the external information display becomes more difficult to see. Therefore, the number-of-games image 26q may be displayed while the effect by light emission (announcement effect) is being executed.

For example, the number-of-games image 26q may be displayed while waiting for customers, or during execution of a demonstration effect, or both. This makes it easier for a player who is about to play a game to grasp the current number of times the symbol variation game has been executed, thereby enhancing convenience.

Next, the "limit function" will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 68 to 79. FIG.

Figure 68 (a1) (a2) shows the notification mode of various notification means when the limit function is activated during the winning game, (b1) (b2) is when the limit function is activated during the variable probability game state In this case, the notification mode of various notification means (notification that the progress of the game has been restricted) is shown.

(a1) assumes that you are playing the third round in a winning game. For example, the image display device 26 displays a round image rg indicating the current number of rounds, a right-handed image mg, and a second start opening reservation number image 26f indicating that there are "2" pieces of reservation information. BGM corresponding to the winning game is output from the speaker 10 along with the display of a predetermined background image corresponding to the winning game.

Further, for example, in the second special symbol display 27b, the seg corresponding to the special symbol E is lit in a form representing "7". On the other hand, the first special symbol display 27a is turned off.
In addition, the right-handed indicator 29c is illuminated (represented by a solid color), and the light-emitting device 9 and the board illumination device 29 emit light in rainbow colors.

Also, for example, the first special symbol reservation display 27c is extinguished (notifying that there is no reservation storage), and for example the second special symbol reservation display 27d is lit (notifying that the second storage area is stored). ), for example, the normal symbol indicator 27e is fluctuating, the normal symbol reserve indicator 27f is lit (informs that the second storage area is stored), and the round indicator 27g is 5 The LED for round is turned off, and the LED for 10 rounds is turned on (informs that the winning game of 10 rounds is being performed). It should be noted that non-filled areas indicate unlit areas, solid areas indicate lit areas, and oblique lines indicate fluctuations.

Then, when the game ball is entered into the big winning opening 24 (or the normal winning opening 23) during the third round of the game, the number of difference balls becomes "95000" or more and the limit is reached. there is
In this case, even if the end condition of the third round (10 game balls enter the big winning hole 24 or the opening time has passed 29.5 seconds) is not established, the big winning hole 24 is closed.

Then, as shown in (a2), display of a predetermined background image corresponding to the winning game is ended, and a message image msg3 such as "The limit function has been activated. is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds). These displays are displayed, for example, in white characters on a black background, but can be arbitrarily set as long as the characters are conspicuous. The card corresponds to the value medium (prepaid card, membership card) described above.

Also, the output of the BGM corresponding to the winning game is stopped, and the speaker 10 outputs an alarm sound such as "beep" and a sound corresponding to the message image msg3.
In addition, in the first special symbol indicator 27a and the second special symbol reservation indicator 27d, all the segments are lit, the right-handed indicator 29c is extinguished, and the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 are flashed in red. .
Also, the LEDs of the first special symbol reservation display 27c, the second special symbol reservation display 27d, the normal design display 27e, the normal design reservation display 27f, and the round display 27g are all lit up.

It should be noted that the warning sound such as "beep" and the sound corresponding to the message image msg3 are output at the maximum volume regardless of the volume value that can be set by the player.

(b1) shows the pattern variation game in the probability variation gaming state, and the image display device 26 displays the variation display of each decorative symbol image 26a to 26c, the variation display of the fourth symbol image 26d, and the probability variation gaming state. RUSH in-image kg indicating that it is, right-handed image mg, second starting opening reservation number image 26f indicating that there are "2" pieces of reservation information, second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k, A holding icon displayed in each of the second start opening second holding ball image display area 26l is displayed, and a predetermined background image corresponding to the variable probability gaming state is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the variable probability gaming state is played from the speaker 10. is being output.

Also, for example, the second special symbol display 27b is fluctuating, and the first special symbol display 27a is turned off.
In addition, the right hand indicator 29c is lit, and the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 are emitting blue and white light.

Also, for example, the first special symbol reservation display 27c is extinguished (notifying that there is no reservation storage), and for example the second special symbol reservation display 27d is lit (notifying that the second storage area is stored). ), for example, the normal symbol indicator 27e is fluctuating, the normal symbol reserve indicator 27f is lit (notifies that the second storage area is stored), and the round indicator 27g is extinguished. ing.

Then, by entering the game ball into the second starting hole 22 (or the normal winning hole 23), the number of difference balls becomes "95000" or more, and the limit is reached.
In this case, the symbol variation game is terminated even if the termination condition of the symbol variation game is not satisfied (even before the confirmation display).
Also, the second start port 22 is closed even if the conditions for ending opening and closing of the second start port 22 (1.8 seconds x 3 times are all executed) are not satisfied. For example, if the opening is being performed for the first time, the opening is terminated, and the second opening for 1.8 seconds and the third opening for 1.8 seconds are not performed.
Then, the mode shown in (b2) is obtained. Since the aspect shown in (b2) is the same as (a2), the explanation here is omitted.

In this way, when the difference ball number becomes "95000" or more, if the winning game is in progress, the winning game is immediately terminated, and if the symbol variation game is in progress, the symbol variation game is terminated immediately. , (a2) and (b2). As a result, the player can quickly recognize that the limit function has been activated in the pachinko gaming machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in (a2), the predetermined background image corresponding to the winning game displayed in (a1) is not displayed (not visible at all), and is notified, and in (b2), it is displayed in (b1). A predetermined background image corresponding to the variable probability gaming state is not displayed (cannot be visually recognized at all) so as to perform notification. As a result, in (a2) and (b2), the player can be made to recognize that the limit function has been activated without discouraging him.
For example, if a part of the predetermined background image corresponding to the winning game is visible in (a2), or if a part of the symbol variation game is visible in (b2), the player will be discouraged. can be prevented.

In addition, in (a2) and (b2), not only the notification by the image display device 26 and the speaker 10 but also each display device managed by the main control board 100 side is notified that the limit function has been activated. . As a result, if the wiring connecting the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is damaged, or the connector is damaged or half-inserted, a command is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. When it is in a situation where it is not possible, the notification by the image display device 26 and the speaker 10 cannot be executed, but the notification by each display device managed by the main control board 100 side can be executed, so that the player is not confused. can be prevented.

In addition, in (a2) and (b2), in addition to notifying that the limit function has been activated, a warning image cau1 saying "Beware of forgetting to take out the card!" bottom. This leads to prevention of forgetting to remove the valuable value medium when playing a game while it is inserted into the insertion slot of the game ball lending device. In addition, when the limit function is activated, it is assumed that the player has acquired a large number of game balls. can encourage you to do so.

In addition, in (a2) and (b2), the warning sound such as "beep" and the sound corresponding to the message image msg3 are output at the maximum volume regardless of the volume value set by the player. , the administrator can quickly recognize that the limit function has been activated.

Note that the notification modes of (a2) and (b2) can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be made to blink instead of lit. Further, the notification in each display device managed by the main control board 100 may be made using some of the display devices instead of all the display devices. For example, only the first special symbol reservation display 27c may be used, only the second special symbol reservation display 27d may be used, only the first special symbol display 27a may be used, Only the 2 special symbol display device 27b may be used.

Note that the voice corresponding to the attention-calling image cau1, such as "Beware of forgetting to remove the card!", has been described as not being output, but the corresponding voice may be output. For example, after a voice saying "The limit function has been activated, please stop playing", a voice saying "Beware of forgetting to remove the card!" may be output. As a result, it is possible to further prevent forgetting to remove the valuable value medium.
On the other hand, the sound corresponding to the caution image cau2, such as "Beware of being addicted!", may not be output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily alerted and feeling uncomfortable.

Also, when the limit function is activated, it is checked whether or not a valuable value medium is inserted into the insertion slot of the game ball lending device, and if it is inserted, a warning image cau1 saying "Beware of forgetting to remove the card!" is displayed, and if the card is not inserted, the warning image cau1 saying "Beware of forgetting to take out the card!" may not be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary alerting.

"Caution forgetting to take a card!" Is a call to attention that is executed at the ending of the winning game when it becomes a win in the normal game state (see FIG. 73), and it becomes a hit in the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state. In some cases, it is not executed at the ending of the winning game (executed only at the time of the so-called first hit).
"Attention to be absorbed!" Is a call to attention that is executed at the ending of the winning game when it is hit in the normal game state (see FIG. 73), and when it is hit in the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state is not executed at the ending of the winning game (executed only at the so-called first time). It is also a warning that is executed even during the demonstration (see FIG. 73).

"Caution for forgetting to take a card!" executed when the limit function is activated may be the same form as the caution executed at the ending of the winning game, or may be a different form. For example, the warning may be stronger when the limit function is activated. For example, as described above, "Beware of forgetting to take a card!" executed when the limit function is activated is accompanied by voice output, but "Beware of forgetting to take out a card!" may be omitted. Also, at the ending of the winning game, the display disappears after a predetermined period of time has passed, but when the limit function is activated, it does not have to disappear after the passage of time, and the user is alerted until the valuable value medium is returned. may be continued (display continued, voice continuously output). As a result, it is possible to appropriately call attention according to the situation.
It should be noted that attention may also be called according to the scene with respect to "Beware of being addicted!".

In addition, (b1) and (b2) have been described in the case where the limit function is activated in the variable probability gaming state, but may be replaced in the time saving gaming state. Also, the case where the limit function is activated during the symbol variation game has been described, but it may be performed while waiting for a customer or during a demonstration.
In addition, when the limit function is activated when a game ball enters the second starting port 22 while waiting for customers or during a demonstration performance, the symbol variation game corresponding to the entering ball is not executed, and the limit function is performed. is activated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by the activation of the limit function as soon as the symbol variation game is started.

Also, in (a2), a predetermined background image corresponding to the winning game may be partially visible, and in (b2), a predetermined background image corresponding to the variable probability gaming state may be partially visible. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the partially visible background image whether the scene in which the limit function was activated was during a winning game or during a variable probability game state. can improve the convenience when summarizing scenes in which the limit function is activated.

FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the notification mode when the time saving game state (time saving game state A) is terminated and transition to the normal game state, and the notification mode when the limit function is activated in the time saving game state.
In addition, when adopting the so-called ST probability variation (for example, if the probability variation gaming state ends when the winning game is not hit in the 100 times pattern variation game), the time saving gaming state may be replaced with the probability variation gaming state.

(a1) shows the last symbol variation game in the time-saving gaming state. An image such as “time saving LAST”, which suggests that it is the last symbol variation game in the gaming state, a right-handed image mg, a second start opening reservation number image 26f indicating that there are “2” pieces of reservation information, a third Suspended icons and the like displayed in each of the second starting opening first reserved ball image display area 26k and the second starting opening second reserved ball image display area 26l are displayed, and a predetermined background image corresponding to the time-saving gaming state is displayed. Along with the display, BGM corresponding to the time-saving game state is output from the speaker 10.例文帳に追加In addition, the right-handed indicator 29c is illuminated (represented by black).

(a2) is a continuation of (a1) and shows the ending screen of the time-saving game state, and although the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c are difficult to see, the fourth pattern image 26d is confirmed as "345". The variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 26o is hidden, the right-handed image mg is hidden, and the right-handed display 29c is turned off. In addition, BGM corresponding to the ending of the time-saving game state is output.

(a3) is a continuation of (a2) and shows the scene when shifting to the normal game state. When the player shifts to the normal game state, a message image msg5 is displayed in the center of the display area, suggesting that left-handed batting is optimal, along with a message image msg5 saying "Return to left-handed batting!" and "Return to left-handed batting! ” and BGM corresponding to the normal game state are output from the speaker 10 .
In this way, when the time-saving gaming state ends with the first end condition (execution of the specified number of symbol variation games), "Return to left-handed!" Notification will be made.

(b1) differs from (a1) only in the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state (for example, remaining 50), and the rest is the same, so the description is omitted.

Then, by entering the game ball into the second starting hole 22 (or the normal winning hole 23), the number of difference balls becomes "95000" or more, and the limit is reached.
In this case, the symbol variation game is terminated even if the termination condition of the symbol variation game is not satisfied (even before the confirmation display).
Also, the second start port 22 is closed even if the conditions for ending opening and closing of the second start port 22 (1.8 seconds x 3 times are all executed) are not satisfied. For example, if the opening is being performed for the first time, the opening is terminated, and the second opening for 1.8 seconds and the third opening for 1.8 seconds are not performed.
Then, the mode shown in (b2) is obtained. Since the mode shown in (b2) is the same as in FIGS. 68(a2) and (b2), description thereof will be omitted here.

(b3) shows the notification mode of the image display device 26 after a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from (b2). When a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed from (b2), the warning sound and voice output from the speaker 10 are stopped, and the image display device 26 displays a message image msg4 saying "The limit function has been activated. The game is stopped." is displayed. In this way, when a predetermined period of time elapses from the state of (b2), the warning sound and voice are stopped, and the content of the message image is changed (the notification mode is changed). As a result, it is possible to prevent the surrounding players from feeling uncomfortable due to the alarm sounds and voices being output indefinitely.

It should be noted that when a predetermined time (eg, 60 seconds) elapses from (b2), the notification mode of (b3) is changed, but for example, the notification mode of (b2) is continued until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off. good too. As a result, the administrator can be urged to take prompt action.

In addition, the display of the message image msg3 such as "The limit function has been activated, please stop playing" and the caution image cau2 such as "Beware of addiction!" Remember!” may continue to be displayed until the card (valuable medium) is returned from the game ball lending device. As a result, forgetting to remove the card (valuable value medium) can be prevented more effectively.

In this way, when the time-saving gaming state ends with the second end condition (activation of the limit function), a notification such as "Return to left-handed!" Instead, it is given priority over that to notify that the limit function has been activated. As a result, it is possible to make an accurate notification according to the situation, and to promptly convey what the player wants to convey.

In addition, when the time-saving gaming state ends with the second end condition (activation of the limit function), direct notification such as "Return to left-handed!" is turned off, it can be said that it indirectly informs the user to stop "right-handed".

FIG. 70 shows an example in which the limit function operates in a winning game.
First, in the first mode, as shown in (a1) to (a3), when the current number of difference balls reaches 95000, the winning game is ended even in the middle of the winning game, and the This is a mode for operating the limit function. In addition, it is assumed that the special symbol E leads to a winning game.

(a1) shows the opening of the winning game, and the current difference ball number is 94700 shots. At the opening, a message image msg6 such as "Caution, the game will be stopped after winning" is displayed. At the same time, the speaker 10 outputs a sound corresponding to the message image msg6. This notifies the player in advance that the limit function will be activated.

After that, in the third round of the winning game, the difference number of balls became 95000, and the limit function was activated. In this case, the winning game is terminated, and (a2) and (a3) become the notification modes described in FIGS. 69(b2) and (b3). In this way, even in the middle of a winning game, when the number of difference balls reaches 95000 shots, the winning game is terminated and the limit function is activated, so that the number of difference balls for which the limit function is activated can be strictly observed. can.

Next, in the second mode, as shown in (b1) and (b2), the winning game is executed to the end even if the current difference ball number reaches 95000, and the limit function is performed after finishing the winning game. It is a mode to operate. In addition, it is assumed that the special symbol E leads to a winning game.

Since (b1) is the same situation and the same notification mode as (a1), the explanation is omitted. After that, in the 3rd round of the winning game, the number of difference balls is 95000, but as shown in (b2), it is executed up to 10 rounds (final round), and the current number of difference balls is 95700. ing. Then, when 10 rounds (the final round) are completed, it becomes the same mode as (a2) and (a3). In this way, even if the number of difference balls reaches 95000 in the middle of the winning game, the winning game is continued to the end without being terminated, and then the limit function is operated, so that the winning game can be enjoyed to the end. In addition, it is possible to give the player a feeling of having obtained a profit.

In this way, as a countermeasure when the number of difference balls reaches 95000 in the winning game, the first mode and the second mode are assumed, but either one or both may be provided. may be

Also, in the first mode, a special round effect may be executed from the first round to the third round. The special round effect is a round effect that is executed only when the number of difference balls reaches 95000 during the winning game and the limit function is activated. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment, and to expect further improvements in the amusement of the game.

Also, in the second mode, after completing 10 rounds (final round) in (b2), a special ending effect may be executed. A special ending effect is an ending effect that is executed only when the difference ball number reaches 95000 during a winning game and the limit function is activated. Then, the limit function should be activated after executing the special ending effect. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment, and to expect further improvements in the amusement of the game.

Also, in the second aspect, both a special round effect and a special ending effect may be executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and a sense of satisfaction, and it is expected that the game interest will be further improved.

In addition, in FIG. 70, the example which the limit function act|operated in the winning game was demonstrated. In other words, the example in which the limit function operates in the game that operates when it is determined to be a hit in the special symbol per determination process of FIG. The limit function may be activated during the execution of A small winning game is a game that operates when a small winning lottery is performed and the small winning lottery is won when it is determined to be a loss in the special symbol winning determination process of FIG. Open a number of times (for example, twice). Also, the limit function may be operated during the so-called small winning RUSH, which makes it easier to win small winning games continuously.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing various operation modes when the limit function is activated.
Since the notification mode of (a2) is the same notification mode as that of FIG. 68(a2), the description thereof is omitted. In the case of (a2), prize ball payout is "allowed", ball rental and payout is "not allowed", and insertion of a card (valuable value medium) into the slot of the game ball lending device is "not allowed". , the return of the card (valuable medium) from the game ball rental device is "allowed", and the adjustment of the volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key button 16 is "not allowed", Launching the menu by the effect button 14 is "impossible".

In other words, in the scene of (a2), it is assumed that the payout of the prize ball for the game ball entering the big winning hole 24 is not completed in both the first mode and the second mode of FIG. . Therefore, by setting the payout of prize balls to ``possible'', the game balls entered the big winning opening 24 during the winning game, but the corresponding prize balls are not paid out, and the player is discouraged. can be prevented.

On the other hand, the ball lending and paying out was set as "impossible". As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has taken a seat without knowing that the limit function has been activated from being given a sense of incompatibility such as being unable to play a game even though the game balls have been lent.

In addition, card insertion was set as "impossible". Thereby, it is possible to notify that the game is impossible at the stage before the above-mentioned step of lending and paying out the balls.
In addition, the card can be returned as "possible". As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the card (valuable medium) is not returned after the limit function is activated.

In addition, the volume and light intensity adjustment was set to "impossible". As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the administrator from becoming difficult to hear the warning sound or voice output in (a2) by adjusting the volume value to be low.
In addition, the menu launch was set to "impossible". As a result, it is possible to prevent the display screen of (a2) from ending and the menu screen to be started up, and the display screen of (a2) can be secured.

(a3) is the same scene as (a3) in FIG. 70, but if the payout of prize balls is not completed in this scene, a message image msg8 such as "payout in progress" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player or manager that the payout has not been completed, and prevent the game from being stopped without receiving the payout of prize balls.

Also, in this scene, the light emitting device 9 blinks in white, and the board illumination device 29 blinks in white. That is, when (a2) is switched to (a3), the light emission modes of the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 change. More specifically, flashy notification such as red flashing is switched to sober notification such as white flashing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the red blinking (flashy notification) from becoming an unnecessary notification.

In the case of (a3), prize ball payout is "allowed", ball rental and payout is "not allowed", and insertion of a card (valuable value medium) into the slot of the game ball lending device is "not allowed". , the return of the card (valuable medium) from the game ball rental device is "allowed", and the adjustment of the volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key button 16 is "not allowed", Launching the menu by the effect button 14 is "impossible". This provides the same effect as the effect described in (a2).

(a4) is a state in which the payout of prize balls is completed. In this scene, the message image msg8 saying "Payment in progress" is hidden, and the light emitting device 9 and board illumination device 29 are turned off. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the payout of prize balls has been completed even when the light emitting mode changes. In addition, when the payout of prize balls is completed in (a2), it is sufficient to switch from (a2) to (a4).

In the case of (a4), prize ball payout is "impossible", ball rental and payout is "impossible", and insertion of a card (valuable value medium) into the slot of the game ball lending device is "impossible". , the return of the card (valuable medium) from the game ball rental device is "allowed", and the adjustment of the volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key button 16 is "not allowed", Launching the menu by the effect button 14 is "impossible". As a result, even though the game is stopped (by setting the payout of prize balls to "impossible"), for example, if a game ball is stationary on the game board and accidentally enters a prize slot, a prize will suddenly be awarded. It is possible to prevent the ball from being put out. Other configurations have the same effects as those described in (a2).

In addition, in (a3), the message image msg8 saying "payout in progress" is displayed, but the number of prize balls to be actually paid out may be displayed. For example, if the number of prize balls to be actually paid out is "200", "200" may be displayed and the number may be subtracted each time the prize balls are paid out. As a result, it becomes easy to understand how long it will take to pay out prize balls, so convenience can be improved.

In addition, since the menu cannot be activated after the scene (a2), for example, in a game machine that activates the menu and can execute a game linked to the communication device (smartphone) possessed by the player, recording cannot be made. occurs. Therefore, the two-dimensional code may be displayed on the image display device 26 in the scene (a2). Thereby, the inconvenience mentioned above can be eliminated.
A game linked with a communication device (smartphone) means, for example, recording the effects executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, displaying the recording in a two-dimensional code, and allowing the player to It is a game (system) that captures a two-dimensional code and records the game on the server.

FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the notification mode when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, (a1) (a2) shows the notification mode of the power ON after the limit function is activated, (b1) ( b2) shows the notification mode of power ON when the limit function is not activated.

(a1) is, for example, the state of FIG. 69(b3) or FIG. 70(a3) in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, and shows the time when the power is about to be turned on. That is, the image display device 26 is in a power OFF state (non-display).

After that, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the screen indicated by (a2) is displayed after displaying, for example, "Power ON" for a predetermined time. In (a2), a message image msg1 such as "The limit function is in operation. Please clear the RAM" is displayed (for example, displayed in white characters on a black background).

Also, the speaker 10 loops and outputs a warning sound such as "beep" and a voice corresponding to the message image msg1.
In addition, the notification mode is such that the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 are blinking in red.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on without depressing the RAM clear switch 105 after the limit function has been activated, a notification prompting the initialization of the main RAM 103 is issued. As a result, the procedure for enabling the game after the game is stopped becomes easy to understand, and it is possible to prevent the game parlor from being confused.
In the state of (a1), when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 105, the notification mode as in (a2) is not performed, and the notification regarding the initialization of the main RAM 103 is performed. will be taken.

(b1) is a state in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off without any particular limit function, and indicates the time when the power is about to be turned on (only the power is turned on). That is, the image display device 26 is in a power OFF state (non-display).

After that, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the screen indicated by (b2) is displayed after displaying, for example, "Power ON" for a predetermined time. In (b2), a message image msg2 saying "The limit management counter has been cleared" is displayed (for example, displayed in white characters on a black background).

Also, the sound corresponding to the message image msg2 is output from the speaker 10 a predetermined number of times.
In addition, the notification mode is such that the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 are lighting in blue.
Then, at a predetermined timing, an "initial operation" such as operation confirmation of the movable body 28 and vibration operation confirmation of the effect button 14 is started.

In this way, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on while the limit function is not operating, it is notified that the limit management counter has been cleared. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the limit management counter has been cleared without fail, and convenience can be improved.

The sound and alarm sound corresponding to the message image msg1 are output in a loop until the main RAM 103 is initialized. ) may be used. As a result, it is possible to perform appropriate notification in accordance with the difference in the degree of importance to be notified.

Although (a2) does not refer to the "initial operation", the "initial operation" may be started at a predetermined timing as in (b2). "initial operation" does not have to be started.
As a result, when the "initial operation" is to be performed, the process of not performing the "initial operation" because the main RAM 103 has not been initialized can be eliminated, and the "initial operation" can be uniformly performed when the power is turned on. , the control process can be simplified. In addition, at least, the confirmation of the operation of the movable body 28 and the confirmation of the vibration operation of the effect button 14 can be completed in the scene (a2). can increase
On the other hand, if the "initial action" is not performed, it may be difficult to see the message image msg1 due to the action of the movable body 28, or it may be difficult to remember the procedure for enabling the game after stopping the game. can be prevented.

Note that the notification shown in (b2) is not limited to the case where only the power is turned on, but may be executed when the setting change process is performed, the setting confirmation process is performed, and the main RAM 103 is initialized. . As a result, regardless of which process is performed, the user can be made aware that the limit management counter has been cleared without fail, thereby enhancing convenience.
On the other hand, when the setting change process is performed, and when the main RAM 103 is initialized (both cases involve initialization of the main RAM 103), the notification shown in (b2) is not performed, and only the power is turned on. In this case, the notification shown in (b2) may be performed when the setting confirmation process is performed (when the main RAM 103 is not initialized). Accordingly, since the notification is performed only when the main RAM 103 is not initialized, it is possible to perform appropriate notification as necessary.

FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining a notification mode for notifying the player that the limit function is installed. If a game is played without knowing that the limit function is installed and the limit function is activated and the game is stopped, trouble may occur between the player and the game parlor. Therefore, it is necessary to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the limit function in various scenes.

(a1) to (a3) show the endings (winning game endings) at the time of the above-described first winning. (a1) shows the 10th round (final round) in the winning game, and the BGM (BGM1) during the round is output from the speaker 10. FIG. Also, the light emitting device 9 and the disc lighting device 29 emit rainbow light.

Then, when the 10th round (final round) is completed, the winning game ending indicated by (a2) is executed. In (a2), the ending BGM (BGM2) is output, and on the image display device 26, "win game end one more time" (display suggesting that the winning game ends and shifts to the variable probability game state) is being done. Also, the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit blue light.

When the display of (a2) is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the display of (a2) is ended, and the display of (a3) is continued at the ending. In (a3), as in (a1) and (a2), the display of the right-handed image mg, the display of the first start opening reservation number image 26e, the display of the second start opening reservation number image 26f, and the display of "Careful for forgetting to take out the card!" An attention-calling image cau1, an attention-calling image cau2 such as "Beware of being addicted!", and an attention-calling image cau3 such as "Equipped with a limit function" are displayed. Also, sound effects are output from the speaker 10 to suggest that each alert image has been displayed. Also, the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit white light.

In this way, the attention calling image cau3 is displayed at the ending (winning game ending) at the time of the first winning. This makes it easier to recognize that the limit function is installed.

Also, in the scene (a3), the BGM1 output in the scene (a1) and the BGM2 output in the scene (a2) are stopped, and sound effects different from these BGM are output. bottom. This makes it easier for the user to recognize that each alert image has been displayed.
Similar effects can be obtained by outputting BGM3 instead of sound effects.

In addition, the lighting mode in the scene (a1), the lighting mode in the scene (a2), and the lighting mode in the scene (a3) are made different from each other. In particular, in the scene (a1), a flashy light emission mode such as rainbow light emission was used, and in the scene (a3), a plain light emission mode such as white light emission was used. As a result, in the scene (a3), it is possible to prevent the situation where only the light emission mode is conspicuous and the attention-calling images become difficult for the player to see.

In (a3), the caution images cau1 to cau3 are displayed, but they may be displayed one by one. The attention-calling image cau3 may be displayed alone by hiding it. This makes it easier to recognize that the limit function is installed.

In addition, when the attention calling image cau3 is displayed alone, an audio output corresponding to the attention calling image cau3 may be performed. This makes it easier to recognize that the limit function is installed.

Also, the attention-calling images cau1 and 2 may be displayed only at the first win, and the attention-calling image cau3 may be displayed not only at the first win but also at every ending of the winning game. This makes it easier to recognize that the limit function is installed.

Further, when a winning game is reached with the special symbol C and the special symbol F, the attention calling image cau3 may not be displayed in the winning game ending. That is, the special symbol C and the special symbol F are special symbols that shift to the time-saving game state without shifting to the probability variation game state after the end of the winning game. less continuity. Therefore, in the winning game ending corresponding to such a special symbol, by not displaying the attention calling image cau3, it is possible to prevent unnecessary notification (notice that the player finds annoying).

(b1) to (b3) show during demonstration. (b1) shows the first period during the demonstration, and on the image display device 26, a display such as "○△ Co., Ltd." indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1, a first start gate reservation number image 26e, The display of the 2nd start mouth reservation number image 26f and the 4th design image 26d which shows a loss are displayed. Also, the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit blue light. Note that BGM and sound effects are not output in (b1) to (b3) because the demonstration is being performed.

(b2) shows the second period during the demonstration, and the image display device 26 displays a display such as "Pachinko XX" indicating the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a first start gate hold number image 26e, The display of the 2nd start mouth reservation number image 26f and the 4th design image 26d which shows a loss are displayed. In addition, the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit rainbow light to brighten the display of the model name.

(b3) shows the third period during the demonstration, and the image display device 26 displays the first start opening reservation number image 26e, the second start opening reservation number image 26f, and the fourth pattern indicating the failure. In addition to the image 26d, there are a warning image cau2 such as "Beware of addiction!", a warning image cau3 such as "Equipped with a limit function", a warning image cau4 such as "Beware of strategy fraud!" A call-up image cau5 is displayed. Also, the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit white light.

In this manner, the attention calling image cau3 is displayed during the demonstration. This makes it easier to recognize that the limit function is installed.

In addition, the lighting mode in the scene (b1), the lighting mode in the scene (b2), and the lighting mode in the scene (b3) are made different from each other. In particular, in the scene (b2), a flashy light emission mode such as rainbow light emission is used, and in the scene (b3), a plain light emission mode such as white light emission is used. As a result, in the scene (b3), it is possible to prevent the situation where only the light emission mode is conspicuous and the attention-calling images become difficult for the player to see.
Also, even during a demonstration in which BGM is not output, the lighting mode changes greatly from (b2) to (b3), so that it is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize that each alert image has been displayed.

In addition, the scene of (a3) and the scene of (b3) share the lighting mode. As a result, when each alerting image is displayed, the same luminescence mode is used regardless of the scene, and the display of each alerting image becomes difficult to see because the luminous mode differs depending on the difference in the scene. can be prevented.

It should be noted that (b1) ~ (b3) was explained as an example during the demonstration in the normal gaming state, but during the demonstration in the time-saving gaming state or during the demonstration in the variable probability gaming state, (b1) ~ (b3) A similar notification may be made. In this case, the right-handed image mg is displayed on the image display device 26, and other display contents may be the same as (b1) to (b3). As a result, the attention calling image cau3 can be displayed during the demonstration regardless of the game state, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the limit function is installed.

Note that in (b3), the caution images cau2 to cau5 are displayed, but they may be displayed one by one, or the caution images cau2, 4 and 5 are displayed, These may be hidden, and the attention-calling image cau3 may be displayed alone. This makes it easier to recognize that the limit function is installed.

In addition, when the attention calling image cau3 is displayed alone, an audio output corresponding to the attention calling image cau3 may be performed. This makes it easier to recognize that the limit function is installed.

FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining a notification mode for notifying the player that the limit function is installed. In FIG. 73, the notification of the ending of the winning game and during the demonstration was explained, but in FIG. 74, the notification mode during customer waiting will be explained.

(a1) is the same as the scene in FIG. 73(b1) during the demonstration. Then, when the display of (a1) is being performed, the player takes a seat, grips the shooting handle 8, and turns on the handle touch sensor.

When the handle touch sensor is turned on, the screen is switched to the customer waiting screen shown in (a2). When the screen is switched to the customer waiting screen, a sound effect such as "welcome" is output from the speaker 10, and BGM corresponding to "○○ stage" is output. In addition, decorative pattern images 26a to 26c, "○○ stage" indicating the current production stage, and the variable icon display area 26o are displayed.

In addition, strip-shaped attention-calling images cau6 such as "equipped with limit function" are displayed at the upper left and lower right of the display area. The band-shaped attention calling image cau6 is composed of, for example, yellow characters on a black background, or vice versa, and has a color scheme that is easy for the player to see.
After that, when the game ball of the first starting port 21 enters, as shown in (a3), the icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 26o, and the decorative symbol images 26a to 26c and the fourth symbol image 26d are displayed. The variable display is started and the attention-calling image cau6 is hidden.
In FIG. 74, the attention calling image cau6 is displayed when the firing handle 8 is gripped during the demonstration and the display switches to the customer waiting screen. you can

In this manner, since the attention calling image cau6 is displayed while the customer is waiting, it is possible to easily recognize that the limit function is installed. In addition, when the firing handle 8 is held during the demonstration, the display is returned to the customer waiting screen instead of the demonstration, and a screen with a band-shaped attention calling image cau6 is displayed, thereby indicating that the limit function is installed. It can be made easier to recognize.

In addition, by hiding the attention calling image cau6 immediately after the start-up winning occurs, it is possible to prevent the symbol variation game from becoming difficult to see and the player from being annoyed.

It should be noted that the attention calling image cau6 may dynamically display the characters "equipped with a limit function". This increases the visual change, making it easier for the user to recognize that the limit function is installed.

FIG. 75 is a diagram explaining a notification mode for notifying the player that the limit function is installed, and (a1) to (a3) are the same as (a1) to (a3) in FIG. is. On the other hand, (b1) and (b2) show the case where the shooting handle 8 is held while the limit function is activated and the handle touch sensor is turned ON.

(b1) is the same scene as FIG. 69(b3) and FIG. 70(a3), in which a message image msg4 saying "The limit function has been activated, the game is stopped" is displayed. Even if the shooting handle 8 is held while the display is being performed and the handle touch sensor is turned ON, the display of (b2) is not switched to that of FIG. 75 (a2), and the display of (b1) is maintained. It has become so. In other words, when the limit function is activated, the caution image cau6 is not displayed even if the steering wheel touch sensor is turned on. Also, sound effects and BGM are not output.
As a result, it is possible to prevent meaningless notification such as notifying that the limit function is installed although the limit function is in operation.

In (b2), no sound effect is output, but a sound effect (voice) such as "the game is stopped" may be output. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perceive that the game is stopped even from the sense of hearing.

FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an advance notification mode for notifying in advance how long the limit function will be activated before the limit function is activated. (a1) ~ (a3) shows the case of performing prior notification during the winning game, (b1) ~ (b3) shows the case of performing prior notification during the time saving game state (time saving game state A) .

(a1) is the 10th round (final round) during the winning game, and the round image rg such as "Round 10", the right shot image mg, the first start opening reservation number image 26e, and the second start opening reservation number image 26f is being displayed. Also, BGM corresponding to the winning game is output from the speaker 10 .

(a2) is the 10th round (final round) during the winning game, and it is assumed that the number of difference balls has reached "90000" due to the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 24. FIG. At this time, a differential ball number counter image rm such as "5000 shots left until the limit is activated" is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the winning game is continuously output from the speaker 10, and the differential ball number counter image rm is displayed. A notification sound is output to notify that. For example, there is a mode in which a notification sound such as "picone" is output, and the difference number counter image rm is displayed. As described above, a condition such as when the difference number of balls reaches "90000" is provided as a guideline for performing advance notification.

After being displayed in (a2), this differential ball number counter image rm is continuously displayed until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. "Continuously displayed" means irrespective of whether the symbol variation game, customer waiting, demonstration, or winning game is in progress. However, it may be hidden during the super reach even during the symbol variation game.

(a3) shows the variable probability game state after the end of the winning game, the differential ball number counter image rm is displayed continuously, and the display such as "4998 shots left until the limit is activated" is displayed in this scene.

(b1) shows the time-saving game state, and is a scene in which the time-saving game state is remaining 50 times. In this scene, a symbol variation game is being executed, and a right-handed image mg, a first starting opening reserved number image 26e, a second starting opening reserved number image 26f, the relevant variation icon, and a reserved icon are also displayed. Also, BGM corresponding to the time-saving game state is output from the speaker 10 .

In (b2), the game ball enters the second starting hole 22 or the normal winning hole 23 during execution of the symbol variation game shown in (b1), and the number of difference balls reaches "90000". At this time, a differential ball number counter image rm such as "5000 shots left until the limit is activated" is displayed, BGM corresponding to the time-saving game state is continuously output from the speaker 10, and the differential ball number counter image rm is displayed. A notification sound is output to notify the fact. For example, there is a mode in which a notification sound such as "picone" is output, and the difference number counter image rm is displayed.

(b3) is a scene in which the time-saving game state remains 49 times. That is, the symbol variation game following (b1) and (b2) is being executed. It is said that the number of out balls increased and the difference number of balls became "89990" during the symbol variation game. In this case, the difference number of balls falls below "90000", but the difference number counter image rm continues to be displayed, for example, "5010 shots left until limit operation" is displayed. That is, once the difference ball number counter image rm is displayed, the difference ball number counter image rm is continuously displayed regardless of whether the difference ball number exceeds or falls below "90000". there is As a result, when the number of difference balls repeatedly increases and decreases near "90000", the image display device 26 becomes difficult to visually recognize by repeating display and non-display of the number of difference counter image rm. can be prevented.

Also, assuming that the differential ball number counter image rm is hidden when the differential ball number falls below "90000", for example, when a new player starts playing with "89000", the player is limited to The game is started without knowing that it is just before the function is activated. In such a case, even if you hit the game with much effort and shift to the variable probability game state, the limit function will immediately operate and the game will be forced to stop. Therefore, by continuing to display the differential ball number counter image rm without hiding it even when the differential ball number falls below "90000", it is possible to flexibly cope with the change of players.

In addition, since the notification sound for notifying that the differential ball number counter image rm has been displayed is output, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the differential ball number counter image rm has been displayed.

It should be noted that the update display of the number-of-balls counter image rm (update display of XX shots more) may be updated and displayed when, for example, a change of 100 shots occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image display device 26 from becoming difficult to see due to frequent update display of the number-of-plays counter image rm (update display of XX later).

FIG. 77 is a diagram explaining each aspect of the advance notification aspect. Although FIG. 76 illustrates the mode of (Example 1) in FIG. 77, the mode of (Example 2) and (Example 3) described below may be used.

(Example 1) is the mode described in FIG. Timing T1 is the timing of shifting to a winning game during the variable probability gaming state, and since the limit management counter is less than "90000", the difference ball number counter image rm is not displayed.

Timing T2 is the timing when the number of differential balls in the limit management counter becomes "90000" or more during the winning game, and the differential number of balls counter image rm is displayed.
Timing T3 is the timing at which the time-saving game state after the winning game ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state. In this way, even when the game state changes, the differential ball number counter image rm is continuously displayed.

Timing T4 indicates that the number of out balls has increased and the limit management counter has become less than "90000" in the normal game state. That is, even if the difference number counter image rm is displayed below the value of "90000", the difference ball number counter image rm is continuously displayed.

(Example 2) is different from (Example 1) in that the difference number counter image rm is hidden when the limit management counter becomes less than "90000" at timing T4, but other points are the same. In this way, there is no problem even if the difference number counter image rm displayed when the limit management counter becomes less than "90000" is not displayed.

(Example 3) is a mode in which the differential ball number counter image rm is displayed in the menu displayed when the effect button 14 is pressed during customer waiting or demonstration. "Inside the menu" means inside the menu screen, and means that when the menu is closed, the difference number counter image rm is also hidden.

Timing T1 is the timing at which the menu is launched during the variable probability gaming state. At this time, the limit management counter is less than "90000", so even if the menu is launched, the difference number counter image rm is not displayed on the menu screen.

Timing T2 is the timing of transitioning to the winning game during the variable probability gaming state, and timing T3 is the timing when the difference ball number of the limit management counter becomes "90000" or more during the winning game. Although the number of difference balls in the limit management counter becomes "90000" or more at the timing T3, the menu cannot be activated during the winning game, so the image of the number of difference balls counter rm is not displayed.

Timing T4 is the timing at which the menu is launched during the time-saving game state. Here, since the difference number of balls in the limit management counter is "90000" or more, the difference number counter image rm is displayed on the menu screen.

Timing T5 is the timing at which the menu is closed, and when the menu is closed, the balance number counter image rm is hidden. Timing T6 is the timing at which the time-saving game state ends and the state shifts to the normal game state. Then, it is assumed that the menu was launched in the shifted normal game state. At timing T6, since the difference number of balls in the limit management counter is "90000" or more, the difference number counter image rm is displayed on the menu screen.

Timing T7 is the timing when the difference number of balls in the limit management counter becomes less than "90000", and thereafter, even if the menu is launched, the difference number counter image rm is not displayed on the menu screen. ing.

By configuring as described above, the following effects can be expected.
In the case of (Example 1), when the players are replaced at the stage immediately before the limit function is activated, the player who is about to start a new game can grasp the current number of difference balls. Further, in case of (example 2), unlike (example 1), it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game after confirming that the differential ball number counter image rm is displayed. It is possible to prevent the operation deterioration of 1. Further, in the case of (Example 3), since the differential ball number counter image rm is displayed in the menu screen, the differential ball number counter image rm interferes with other displayed objects during the symbol variation game. You can prevent it from being lost.

Note that the difference ball number counter image rm is not limited to the content described above, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when the number of difference balls in the limit management counter reaches "90000" or more, it will be limited to an abstract notification such as "the activation of the limit function is approaching". , ``2000 shots left until the limit is activated'' may be given. As a result, accurate notification can be realized according to the degree of possibility that the limit function will operate. For example, when the difference ball number of the limit management counter becomes "90000" or more, even if "5000 more shots until the limit is activated" is displayed, if the next hit is a special symbol F that does not shift to the variable probability game state, There is a possibility that it will not reach 5000 more rounds. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the notification from being wasted by performing the abstract notification and the specific notification in stages as described above.

Also, when the number of difference balls in the limit management counter reaches "90000" or more, "5000 shots left until the limit is activated" may be displayed, and the display may be hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. . After that, as the number of difference balls in the limit management counter approaches "95000", the display frequency of the number of difference number counter image rm may be increased. For example, when the difference number of balls in the limit management counter reaches "94000", a display such as "XX shots left until limit operation" may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) in increments of 100 shots. This makes it possible to more effectively recognize that the activation of the limit function is approaching.

FIG. 78 and FIG. 79 are diagrams for explaining aspects of the look-ahead effect according to the current number of difference balls.
FIG. 78 shows a look-ahead effect performed during a winning game, and FIG. 79 shows a look-ahead effect performed during a symbol variation game. It should be noted that the winning game is a special symbol E (corresponding to 10 rounds) and has reached the winning game.

(a1) indicates that a winning game is in progress, and that the third round of the game is currently being played. The second start opening reservation number image 26f displays "4" indicating that four reservations are stored, and the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the second start opening 22 (see FIG. 9) ) are all stored. Win determination information (random value) is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. It should be noted that the number of difference balls in the current limit management counter is "1000".

(a2) shows the third round of the winning game, and the meteor shower image hr1 is displayed from the upper right to the lower left of the screen. This meteor shower image hr1 is an image that is displayed only when there is a win in the first to fourth storage areas (see FIG. 9). It is suggested that the winning game is continuously executed after the end.

(a3) is a display mode after the display of the meteor shower image hr1 is finished, and when the display of the meteor shower image hr1 is finished, it is suggested that the winning game will be continuously executed in the lower right part of the display area. A "V" icon image hr2 is displayed. This "V" icon image hr2 is continuously displayed after (a3) until the final round. As a result, the player can understand that the winning game will be continuously executed after the current winning game is finished.

In (b1) to (b3), as in (a1) to (a3), the first storage area to the fourth storage area (see FIG. 9) contain hit determination information (random value). Different from (a1) to (a3), the difference number of the current limit management counter is "94500". In other words, it is a situation in which the limit function can be activated during the winning game. In such a case, the display of the meteor shower image hr1 and the "V" icon image hr2 are displayed in the same manner as in (a1) to (a3), suggesting that the winning game will be executed continuously. , the degree of discouragement of the player also increases. In other words, if the limit function does not operate, the winning game can be obtained continuously, but it cannot be obtained due to the operation of the limit function. Therefore, as shown in (b1) to (b3), even if there is hit determination information (random value) in the first to fourth storage areas (see FIG. 9), the meteor shower image hr1 is displayed. By restricting the display of the icon image hr2 and the "V" icon image hr2 (limiting the look-ahead effect), it is possible to prevent disappointment of the player.

It should be noted that the limitation of the look-ahead effect described in FIG. 78 may be applied to a gaming machine having the above-described ST type variable probability game state or a game machine having a falling lottery type probability variable game state. Also, in a so-called 1-type 2-type gaming machine, it may be applied to a "V stock effect" performed during a winning game. Also, the present invention may be applied to a so-called "1G run" in which a big bonus is continuously generated in a reel-type gaming machine (slot machine).

In addition, the effect to restrict during the winning game is not limited to the look-ahead effect, but may be the variable probability promotion effect. The probability variation promotion effect is, for example, a transition to a winning game with a special symbol E, but the combination of decorative symbol images displays a combination (for example, 444) that suggests a transition to a time-saving gaming state, and is reversed during the winning game. It is a production that makes it look like it has been promoted to a variable gaming state. For example, when the number of difference balls of the current limit management counter is "94500", if the variable probability promotion effect is executed, even though one more winning game can be obtained, it is obtained by the operation of the limit function. Since it disappears, there is a risk of disappointing the player. Therefore, when the difference ball number of the current limit management counter is "94500", the player is discouraged by restricting the execution of the variable probability promotion performance even if the special symbol E shifts to the winning game. can be prevented.

In addition, the look-ahead effect may be executed or restricted in the situations shown in FIGS. 78(b1) to (b3). For example, a lottery may be held to decide whether to execute or not.

FIG. 79 shows the relationship between the look-ahead effect during the symbol variation game and the current number of difference balls.
(a1) shows the ending of the winning game, the number of difference balls at this time is "94950", and the limit function is activated after "50" shots. In addition, an image such as "one more time" is displayed to suggest that the state of the game is changed to the variable probability game state even after the end of the winning game.

(a2) shows the symbol variation game in the probability variation gaming state, and the RUSH middle image kg, the right hitting image mg, etc. indicating the probability variation gaming state are displayed. At this time, the number of difference balls is "94940", and the limit function will be activated after "60" shots.

(a3) shows that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 22 in the situation of (a2), the second starting hole holding number image 26f changes from "2" to "3", A new pending icon is displayed in the 2nd starting port third pending ball image display area 26m. In addition, the holding icon displayed in the second start opening third holding ball image display area 26m is, for example, displayed as a blue icon (solid), and the winning sound "Poron♪" corresponding to the blue icon is played from the speaker 10. output. That is, the above-described reserved prefetch effect is executed. It should be noted that even if the number of difference balls at the time of (a3) is "94999", the execution of the pending look-ahead effect is not restricted and can be executed.

Thus, during the symbol variation game, unlike during the winning game, execution of the look-ahead effect is not restricted even immediately before the limit function is activated. The reason for this is that it is assumed that the situation in which the limit function operates is more during the winning game than during the symbol variation game. In other words, since the possibility of the limit function being activated during the symbol variation game is lower than during the winning game, restricting the execution of the look-ahead effect even during the symbol variation game will only lead to a decrease in the interest in the game. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead effect is allowed without restriction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from deteriorating due to sudden stoppage of execution of the look-ahead performance during the pattern variation game, and it is possible to execute the look-ahead performance accurately according to the situation in which the limit function operates.

In addition, in FIG. 79, as the look-ahead effect performed during the symbol variation game, the suspended look-ahead effect has been described as an example, but not limited to this, the execution of other look-ahead effects may also be permitted.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment will be described using FIG.
A pachinko gaming machine 1000 shown in the second embodiment is an enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine.
Incidentally, although an enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine will be described as an example, a medal-less game machine that does not use game medals may be handled in the same way.

The pachinko game machine 1000 has game balls sealed inside the game machine, making it impossible for a player to touch the game balls. The configuration for shooting game balls to the game area is the same as in the first embodiment.

When one game ball is shot into the game area, 1 is subtracted from the game ball information possessed by the player, and when the game ball enters a winning hole provided in the game area, the game ball information possessed by the player is obtained. is added for the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning hole into which the ball is entered. The configuration of the prize winning openings provided in the game area and the configuration of the image display device 26 and the like are the same as in the first embodiment.

The pachinko game machine 1000 is provided with a game ball number indicator on a member corresponding to the receiving tray member 5 of the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, and displays game ball information possessed by the player. ing. In addition, a counting button is provided near the game ball number display, and when the counting button is pressed, game ball information is transmitted to a card unit provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1000 and inserted into the card unit. The game ball information is recorded on the card that is played. On the other hand, when the game start button provided on the card unit is pressed, the game ball information recorded on the card is subtracted (for example, "125" is subtracted by operating the game start button once), and the number of game balls is displayed. "125" will be displayed on the vessel. That is, the card unit and the pachinko gaming machine 1000 are communicably connected.

The card unit is provided with a control section, and the control section is provided with an external output terminal for communicating with the hall computer 1001 and the hall server 1002 . The hall server 1002 transfers information received from the pachinko game machine 1000 to the information management center 1003 .

The pachinko gaming machine 1000 also has a limit function similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment. is mentioned. As a result, the information management center 1003 can also grasp the information on the number of safe balls, the number of out balls, and the number of difference balls. It is possible to grasp.

In this way, not only the management of the amusement arcade but also the collective management by the information management center 1003, for example, after the limit function is activated, actions such as clearing the RAM and making it possible to play within business hours of the same day. can be deterred.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine is used, and the information of the pachinko game machine 1000 is sent to the information management center 1003 via the control unit of the card unit. being transmitted is greatly different from the first embodiment. On the other hand, the contents of the first embodiment are basically applied mutatis mutandis to other configurations, such as performing a special symbol hit determination process, performing an effect according to the result of the determination, and providing a plurality of game states. you can

The details of the means and the like described in the game machine will be described.
Main control means (main control board 100) for controlling the progress of the game, and predetermined production means (image display device 26, speaker 10, light emitting device 9) based on control information (various commands) transmitted from the main control means , and an effect control means (effect control unit 200a) for controlling effects in the board lighting device 29), wherein the main control means acquires determination information (random number value for hit determination). means (main CPU 101); determining means (main CPU 101) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (winning game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Pre-determination means (main CPU 101) for pre-determining information (for example, determination processing at the time of winning in step S104-1-9 in FIG. 18); Measure the first value (the number of safe balls) from the ball, the game ball entering the second starting hole, the game ball entering the normal winning hole 23, and the game ball entering the big winning hole 24). At the same time, measuring means (main CPU 101, main RAM 103) for measuring a second value (number of out balls) when a second measurement condition is established (detection of game balls by out detection SW 25a); Calculation means (main CPU 101) for calculating specific information (number of difference balls) based on the second value; (performing limit function activation processing) regulation means (main CPU 101), and the effect control means executes the special game when the specific information does not satisfy a predetermined threshold value due to the execution of the special game. While it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, pending look-ahead effect) based on the prior determination, if the specific information satisfies a predetermined threshold value due to the execution of the special game, the article during the execution of the special game It is characterized in that it is possible to limit the execution of the predetermined effect based on the previous determination.

In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine was used as an example, but the contents described in this embodiment can also be applied to a reel-type game machine (slot machine), or a rock-and-ball game machine. It can also be applied to an arrange ball game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 26 Image display device 100 Main control board 200 Effect control board

A game machine according to the present invention includes main control means for executing predetermined control , and effect control means for executing effect in predetermined effect means based on control information transmitted from the main control means. a machine, wherein the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information; determination means for determining whether or not to make a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information; pre- determining means for pre-determining the determination information before and when the value of the specific information measured by the establishment of the measurement condition satisfies a predetermined value , the execution of the predetermined control is restricted . and a limit means , wherein the effect control means executes a predetermined effect based on the prior determination during execution of the special game when execution of the predetermined control is restricted after the end of the special game. can be restricted.

A game machine according to the present invention comprises main control means for executing predetermined control, effect control means for executing effect in predetermined effect means based on control information transmitted from the main control means, and A gaming machine comprising a prize-winning opening into which a game ball can be entered , wherein the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring judgment information, and executes a special game advantageous to the player based on the judgment information. Determination means for determining whether or not to play, advance determination means for pre-determining the determination information before the determination, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state are controlled. specific information that can be calculated from the game state control means capable of when the value satisfies a predetermined value, it is possible to limit the execution of the predetermined control to make the game progress difficult, wherein the game state control means controls the special game in the normal game state. When it is determined to execute a game, it is possible to control the specific game state after the end of the special game, and the effect control means is determined to execute the special game in the normal game state, and the special When the execution of the predetermined control is restricted after the end of the game and the progress of the game becomes difficult , the execution of the predetermined effect based on the prior determination can be restricted during the execution of the special game. do.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects in predetermined effect means based on control information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means is
Acquisition means for acquiring judgment information;
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information;
advance determination means for prior determination of the determination information before the determination means;
measuring means for measuring a first value when a first measurement condition is satisfied and measuring a second value when a second measurement condition is satisfied;
calculation means for calculating specific information based on the first value and the second value;
regulation means for regulating the progress of the game when the specific information satisfies a predetermined threshold;
with
The production control means is
When the specific information does not meet a predetermined threshold due to the execution of the special game,
While it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on the prior determination during execution of the special game,
When the specific information satisfies a predetermined threshold by executing the special game,
It is possible to limit execution of a predetermined effect based on the prior determination during execution of the special game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images